DA20-C1 AFM Rev 28

AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL
DA20-C1
DOC # DA202-C1
DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES INC.
1560 CRUMLIN SIDEROAD, LONDON, ONTARIO
CANADA N5V 1S2
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced or copied
in any form or by any means without written permission
of DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES INC.
Copyright 2012 by DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES INC., London, Ontario
REV 28
INITIAL ISSUE: December 19, 1997

February 28, 2014
DA20-C1 AIRPLANE FLIGHT

MANUAL
This manual contains the maintenance information

required by JAR-VLA. Contents and revision status
can be found in the TABLE OF CONTENTS and the
RECORD OF REVISIONS.

1560 CRUMLIN SIDEROAD
London, Ontario, Canada N5V 1S2
http://www.diamondair.com/
For more information contact:
Technical Publications
+1-519-457-4000 Ext.3173
techpubs@diamondair.com
INITIAL ISSUE: December 19, 1997

February 28, 2014
DOC NO. DA202-C1

REV 28
DA20-C1 Flight Manual
Introduction
AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL

DA20-C1
Category of Airworthiness
: UTILITY
Applicable Airworthiness Requirements
: AWM Chapter 523-VLA
Serial Number
: _____________
Registration
: _____________
Doc. No.
: DA202-C1
Date of Issue
: 19 December 1997
Date of Re-issue
: Revision 26 - 15 May 2012
This manual must be carried in the aircraft at all times! Scope and revision status can be
found in the List of Effective Pages and in the Record of Revisions.
The pages identified as DOT-appr. in the List of Effective Pages are approved by:
Signature
: William Jupp
Authority
: For, Chief, Flight Test

For, Director, Aircraft Certification
Transport Canada
Date of approval
: 19 December1997
This airplane is to be operated in compliance with the information and limitations contained
herein.
_______________________________________________________________________
1560 CRUMLIN SIDEROAD
London, Ontario, Canada N5V 1S2
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 0 - 1
Introduction
PREFACE
Congratulations on your choice of the DA20-C1.
Safe handling of an airplane increases and ensures your safety and provides you with
many hours of enjoyment. For this reason you should take the time to familiarize yourself
with your new airplane.
We ask that you carefully read this Flight Manual and pay special attention to the
recommendations given. A careful study of the manual will reward you with many hours of
trouble-free flight operation of your airplane.
All rights reserved. Reproduction of this manual or any portion

thereof by any means without the express written permission of
DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES INC. is prohibited.
Copyright by DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES INC.,
London, Ontario
Page 0 - 2
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Introduction
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter
GENERAL......................................................................................................... 1
OPERATING LIMITATIONS .............................................................................. 2
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ........................................................................ 3
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES .......................................................... 4
PERFORMANCE .............................................................................................. 5
WEIGHT AND BALANCE & EQUIPMENT LIST ............................................... 6
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND SYSTEMS...................................... 7
AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND MAINTENANCE ..................................... 8
SUPPLEMENTS ............................................................................................... 9
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 0 - 3
Introduction
Intentionally left blank
Page 0 - 4
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Introduction
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Pages that are DOT-approved (appr) pages Ch.

are shown before the page number:
Page
Date
Approval
0-1
15-May-12
Preface
0-2
15-May-12
TOC
0-3
15-May-12
Blank
0-4
15-May-12
LOEP
0-5
28-Feb-14
LOEP
0-6
28-Feb-14
LOEP
0-7
28-Feb-14
LOEP
0-8
28-Feb-14
LOEP
0-9
28-Feb-14
Blank
0-10
28-Feb-14
Supps
0-11
12-Feb-13
Supps
0-12
12-Feb-13
Supps
0-13
28-Feb-14
Supps
0-14
12-Feb-13
ROR
0-15
28-Feb-14
ROR
0-16
28-Feb-14
ROR
0-17
28-Feb-14
ROR
0-18
28-Feb-14
ROR
0-19
28-Feb-14
ROR
0-20
28-Feb-14
Rev Log
0-21
28-Feb-14
Rev Log
0-22
28-Feb-14
Highlights
0-23
28-Feb-14
Highlights
0-24
28-Feb-14
TR Log
0-25
28-Feb-14
Ch.
0
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Page
Date
TR Log
0-26
28-Feb-14
S. Service
0-27
28-Feb-14
Blank
0-28
28-Feb-14
1-1
15-May-12
1-2
15-May-12
1-3
15-May-12
1-4
15-May-12
1-5
15-May-12
1-6
15-May-12
1-7
15-May-12
1-8
15-May-12
1-9
15-May-12
1-10
15-May-12
1-11
15-May-12
1-12
15-May-12
1-13
15-May-12
1-14
15-May-12
1-15
15-May-12
1-16
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-1
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
2-2
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
2-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-5
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
2-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-7
12-Feb-13
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 5
Introduction

Page
Date
Ch.
Page
Date
DOT-appr
2-8
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr
3-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-10
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-11
15-May-12
DOT-appr
3-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-12
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-13
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-14
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-15
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-16
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-17
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-10
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-18
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-11
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-19
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-12
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-20
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-13
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-21
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-14
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-22
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-15
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
2-23
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-16
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-24
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-17
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-25
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-18
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-26
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-19
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-27
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
3-20
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-28
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
3-21
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-29
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
3-22
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-30
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
2-31
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
4-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-32
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
4-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-33
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
4-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
2-33
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
4-4
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-5
15-May-12
Ch.
2
Page 0 - 6
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction

Page
Date
Ch.
Page
Date
DOT-appr
4-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-9
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
5-6
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-10
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-7
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-11
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-8
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-12
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-9
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-13
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-10
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr
4-14
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-11
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-15
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-12
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-16
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-13
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-17
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-14
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-18
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-15
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-19
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-16
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-20
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-17
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-21
15-May-12
DOT-appr
5-18
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
4-22
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-23
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-24
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-25
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-26
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-27
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-28
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-29
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr
4-30
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-9
15-May-12
Ch.
4
DOT-appr
5-1
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-10
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
5-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
6-11
15-May-12
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 7
Introduction

Page
Date
Ch.
Page
Date
DOT-appr
6-12
15-May-12
7-17
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-13
15-May-12
7-18
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-14
15-May-12
7-19
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-15
28-Feb-14
7-20
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-16
28-Feb-14
7-21
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-17
28-Feb-14
7-22
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-18
28-Feb-14
7-23
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-19
28-Feb-14
7-24
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-20
28-Feb-14
7-25
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-21
28-Feb-14
7-26
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
6-22
28-Feb-14
7-27
12-Feb-13
7-28
12-Feb-13
Ch.
6
Page 0 - 8
7-1
12-Feb-13
7-29
12-Feb-13
7-2
12-Feb-13
7-30
12-Feb-13
7-3
12-Feb-13
7-31
12-Feb-13
7-4
15-May-12
7-32
12-Feb-13
7-5
15-May-12
7-6
15-May-12
8-1
15-May-12
7-7
15-May-12
8-2
15-May-12
7-8
15-May-12
8-3
15-May-12
7-9
15-May-12
8-4
15-May-12
7-10
12-Feb-13
8-5
15-May-12
7-11
12-Feb-13
8-6
15-May-12
7-12
12-Feb-13
8-7
15-May-12
7-13
12-Feb-13
8-8
15-May-12
7-14
12-Feb-13
8-9
15-May-12
7-15
12-Feb-13
8-10
15-May-12
7-16
12-Feb-13
8-11
15-May-12
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction

Ch.
Page
Date
8-12
15-May-12
9-1
15-May-12
9-2
15-May-12
9-3
15-May-12
9-4
12-Feb-13
9-5
12-Feb-13
9-6
12-Feb-13
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 9
Introduction
Intentionally Left Blank
Page 0 - 10
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction

SUPPLEMENTS

Supp
NOTE
S2
It is only necessary to maintain those

Supplements which pertain to optional
equipment that may be installed in your
airplane.
Refer to Page 9-2 for the Index of Supplements.
S3

Supp
S1
S2
Page
Date
DOT-appr
S1-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S1-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-10
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-11
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-12
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-13
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-14
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-15
15-May-12
DOT-appr S1-16
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
S2-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S2-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S2-3
15-May-12
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Page
DOT-appr
S2-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S2-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S2-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S3-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S3-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S3-3
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
S3-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S3-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S3-6
15-May-12
S4
S5
Date
Supplement 4 Removed
DOT-appr
S5-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S5-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr S5-10
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S5-11
15-May-12
DOT-appr S5-12
15-May-12
DOT-appr S5-13
15-May-12
DOT-appr S5-14
15-May-12
February 12, 2013
Page 0 - 11
Introduction

Supp
S6
Page
Date
Supp
S9
DOT-appr
S6-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S6-2
DOT-appr
S8
Date
DOT-appr
S9-1
15-May-12
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S9-2
15-May-12
S6-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S9-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S6-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S9-4
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
S6-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S6-6
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S10-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S6-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr S10-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S6-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr S10-3
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
S6-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr S10-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr S6-10
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-1
15-May-12
S10
S11
S7
Page
DOT-appr
S7-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr S11-7
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr
S7-7
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S11-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S7-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr S7-10
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-3
15-May-12
S12
DOT-appr
S8-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S8-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S8-3
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S12-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr
S8-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr S12-8
15-May-12
Page 0 - 12
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Introduction

Supp
Page
Date
Supp
S12
DOT-appr S12-9
12-Feb-13
S13
DOT-appr S12-10 15-May-12
Page
Date
DOT-appr S13-26 28-Feb-14

S13
DOT-appr S13-1
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-3
S14
DOT-appr S14-1
15-May-12
15-May-12
DOT-appr S14-2
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-4
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr S14-3
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr S14-4
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr S14-5
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-7
15-May-12
DOT-appr S14-6
15-May-12
DOT-appr S13-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr S14-7
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S13-9
15-May-12
DOT-appr S14-8
15-May-12
DOT-appr S15-1
12-Feb-13
28-Feb-14
DOT-appr S15-2
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-3
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-4
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-5
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-6
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-7
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-8
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S15-9
12-Feb-13

DOT-appr S1-12
S15

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 13
Introduction

Supp
Page
Date
S16
DOT-appr S16-1
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S16-2
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S16-3
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S16-4
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S16-5
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S16-6
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S17-1
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S17-2
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S17-3
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S17-4
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S17-5
12-Feb-13
DOT-appr S17-6
12-Feb-13
S16
S17
Page 0 - 14
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Introduction

RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revisions and Temporary Revisions to this manual, with the exception of actual weighing
data, are recorded in the following table. Revisions and Temporary Revisions of approved
sections must be endorsed by the responsible airworthiness authority.
In the Manual Revision, new or amended text will be indicated by a bold black vertical line
in the left hand margin of a revised page. The Manual Revision number and Document
number will be shown on the bottom right hand corner of the page on even pages and will
be shown on the bottom left hand corner of the page on odd pages. Page numbers will
show on the opposite corner of the pages.
Temporary Revisions are used to provide information on systems or equipment until the
next permanent Revision of the Airplane Flight Manual.
The airplane may only be operated if the Flight Manual is up to date.
Approved
Rev. No.
Affected Pages
Rev 17
0-4, 0-5, 0-6, 0-9, 2 -7, 2-17,

4-16, 7-12, 7-13, S2-1,
S2-2, S2-3, S2-4, S4-4.
Rev 18
0-4, 0-5, 0-9 6-13, 6-14,

6-15, 6-16.
Rev 19
0-4, 0-5, 0-9, 2-5, 7-15,

7-16.
Rev 20
0-4, 0-6, 0-9, S4-1,S4-2,

S4-3, S4-4, S4-5, S4-6,
S4-7, S4-8, S4-9, S4-10,
S4-11, S4-12, S4-13, S4-14,
S4-15.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Date
Name
19 Mar 04
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
for Director, Aircraft
Certification
Transport Canada
22 Mar 05
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
24 Jun 05
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
18 Aug 05
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
Febraury 28, 2014
Page 0 - 15
Introduction
Approved
Rev. No.
Rev 21
TR-1
Affected Pages
0-4, 0-5, 0-10 , 0-11, 0-12,

6-15, 6-16, 7-6.
0-10, 2-5.
Rev 22
0-4, 0-5, 0-6, 0-10, 2-4, 2-7,

2-17, 4-14, 4-20, 5-20, S4-4,
S4-12, S4-13.
Rev 23
0-4, 0-6, 0-10, 0-11, 2-1,

2-4, 2-7, 2-8,2-9,2-10, 2-11,
2-12, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16,
2-17, 2-18, 2-19, 4-14, 4-20,
S4-1, S4-4, S4-5, S4-6,
S4-7, S4-8, S4-9, S4-10,
S4-11, S4-12, S4-13, S4-14,
S4-15, S4-16.
TR
08-01
Rev 24
Page 0 - 16
0-10, 2-19, 4-5, 6-13, 6-14,

6-15, 6-16.
All
Date
Name
05 Sep 06
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
02 Oct 07
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
02 Nov 07
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
11 Dec 07
W. Jupp
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
25 Aug 08
R. Walker
A/Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
30 Apr 09
R. Walker
Certification
Transport Canada
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction

Approved
Rev. No.
Affected Pages
TR
09-02
4-10, 4-11, 4-12.
TR
09-03
0-9, 0-10, 6-13 thru 6-20,

9-1, 9-2 and 9-S13-1 thru
9-S13-24.
TR
10-01
TR
10-02
Rev 25
TR
10-03
0-10, 6-3 and 6-5.
0-10, 4-9, 7-11.
Cover Page, 0-1, 0-2, 0-5

thru 0-20, 1-1 thru 1-14, 2-1,
2-5, 2-10 thru 2-20, 4-9 thru
4-12, 4-14, 5-8, 5-10, 5-12,
6-3, 6-5, 6-16, 6-17, 7-1,
7-2, 7-9, 7-12 thru 7-24, 8-1
thru 8-10, 9-1, 9-2. S4-14,
S4-16, S11-1 thru S11-6,
S12-1 thru S12-8 S13-1 thru
S13-22.
0-13, 2-19, 3-5, 4-10 thru
4-12A, 7-14, S1-8 thru
S1-11.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Date
Name
30 Jun 09
R. Walker
Certification
Transport Canada
12 Nov 09
D. Stephen
Certification
Transport Canada
26 Feb 10
Jim Martin
for Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
28 Feb 10
Jim Martin
for Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
07 Apr 10
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
20 Dec 10
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
Febraury 28, 2014
Page 0 - 17
Introduction
Approved
Rev. No.
TR 11-01
TR 11-02
TR 11-03
Rev 26
TR12-01
TR12-02
Page 0 - 18
Affected Pages
0-13, 2-10, S4-13.
0-13, 2-9, 2-10.
0-13, S4-16.
ALL
Name
01 Aug 11
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
15 Aug 11
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
20 Dec 11
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
03 Jul 12
0-20, 2-5, 2-12, 6-15, and

6-19.
0-20, 2-7 and 4-25.
Date
14 Aug 12
23 Nov 12
February 28, 2014
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
for Director, National Aircraft
Certification
Transport Canada
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
W. Istchenko
Chief, Flight Test
Certification
Transport Canada
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction
Page 0 - 20
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction

REVISIONS LOG
This Revisions Log should be used to record all Permanent Revisions issued and inserted
into this manual. The affected pages of any revision must be inserted into the manual as
well as the Record of Revisions upon receipt. The pages superseded by the revision must
be removed and destroyed. The Revisions Log should be updated by hand.
Changes are identified on those pages affected by a revision bar.
Rev. No.
Date Issued:
Inserted On:
Inserted By:
Issue 1
19 Dec 97
19 Dec 97
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 1
13 Aug 98
13 Aug 98
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 2
28 Aug 98
28 Aug 98
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 3
08 Dec 98
08 Dec 98
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 4
05 Jan 99
05 Jan 99
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 5
10 Mar 99
10 Mar 99
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 6
07 Apr 99
07 Apr 99
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 7
21 Jun 99
21 Jun 99
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 8
07 Dec 99
07 Dec 99
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 9
11 Apr 00
11 Apr 00
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 10
14 Aug 00
14 Aug 00
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 11
20 Mar 01
20 Mar 01
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 12
16 Apr 01
16 Apr 01
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 13
28 May 01
28 May 01
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 14
09 Aug 01
09 Aug 01
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 15
23 Apr 02
23 Apr 02
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 16
18 Oct 02
18 Oct 02
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 17
19 Mar 04
19 Mar 04
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 18
22 Mar 05
22 Mar 05
Diamond Aircraft
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 0 - 21
Introduction
Rev. No.
Date Issued:
Inserted On:
Inserted By:
Rev 19
24 Jun 05
24 Jun 05
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 20
18 Aug 05
18 Aug 05
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 21
05 Sep 06
05 Sep 06
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 22
02 Nov 07
02 Nov 07
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 23
11 Dec 07
11 Dec 07
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 24
16 Apr 09
26 Jun 09
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 25
06 Apr 10
16 Apr 10
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 26
15 May 12
10 Jul 12
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 27
12 Feb 13
01 Apr 2013
Diamond Aircraft
Rev 28
28 Feb 14
Page 0 - 22
Febraury 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction
REVISION HIGHLIGHTS
GENERAL
The table below highlights the changes that have been incorporated into Revision 28.
CHAPTER
PAGES
Cover Page
Cover page
Cover Page revised to show Revision 28, dated

February 28, 2014.
0-5 thru 0-10

and 0-13
List of Effective Pages (LOEP) and Supplements LOEP

revised. Rev bars inserted adjacent to the changed pages.
0-15-0-20
Removed old revision information which reduced record of

revision pages by 2
New Revision information added on page 0-19.
HIGHLIGHTS
0-21 and 0-22
Pagination and Revision Log entries.
0-23 and 0-24
Pagination and Revision Highlights pages for Revision 28.
0-25 and 0-28
Pagination
2-28 and 2-29
Added new instrument panel graphics
2-30 thru 2-34
Pagination
5-9
6-15 thru 6-21
Supplement 13
S13-4
Added new equipment software version
S13-10
Added new instrument panel graphic
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Revised Take Off chart to correct wind component

Revised equipment list
S13-11 thru
S13-22
Pagination
S13-23 and
S13-24
Added New Instrument panel graphic
S13-25 and
S13-26
GTN 650 Details
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 23
Introduction
CHAPTER
Supplement 13
Page 0 - 24

PAGES
S13-27 andS1328
HIGHLIGHTS
Pagination
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction

TEMPORARY REVISIONS LOG
All Temporary Revisions (TRs) to this manual must be inserted and signed as being
inserted into the manual in the following table.
Temporary
Revision
Number
Inserted
Date Issued
TR-1
Date
Name
02 Oct 07
02 Oct 07
Diamond Aircraft
TR 08-01
25 Aug 08
25 Aug 08
Diamond Aircraft
TR 09-02
30 Jun 09
30 Jun 09
Diamond Aircraft
TR 09-03
12 Nov 09
12 Nov 09
Diamond Aircraft
TR 10-01
26 Feb 10
26 Feb 10
Diamond Aircraft
TR 10-02
28 Feb 10
28 Feb 10
Diamond Aircraft
TR 10-03
20 Dec 10
20 Dec 10
Diamond Aircraft
TR 11-01
01 Aug 11
01 Aug 11
Diamond Aircraft
TR 11-02
15 Aug 11
15 Aug 11
Diamond Aircraft
TR 11-03
20 Dec 11
20 Dec 11
Diamond Aircraft
NOTE: All the Temporary Revisions above have been incorporated into the AFM
at Rev 26.
TR 12-01
01 Aug 12
14 Aug 12
Diamond Aircraft
TR 12-02
09 Oct 12
23 Nov 12
Diamond Aircraft
NOTE: The Temporary Revisions above have been incorporated into the AFM
at Rev 27.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 25
Introduction
Temporary
Revision
Number
Page 0 - 26
Inserted
Date Issued
Date
Febraury 28, 2014
Name
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Introduction
SUBSCRIPTION SERVICE
Diamond Aircraft Publications Revision Subscription Contacts
To ensure safe operation and maintenance of the DA20-C1 aircraft, it is
recommended that operators verify that their documentation is at the correct
revision levels. For revision and subscription service please contact the following:
1.
2.
3.
DA20-C1 related manuals and publications.

North America, Australia and Africa:
Other:
Diamond Aircraft Industries Inc.

Customer Support
1560 Crumlin Sideroad
London, Ontario
Canada.
N5V 1S2
Phone:
519-457-4041
Fax:
519-457-4060
Diamond Aircraft Industries GmbH

Customer Support
N.A. Otto-Strasse 5
A-2700 Wiener Neustadt
Austria
Phone: +43-(0) 2622-26700
Fax:
+43-(0) 2622-26780
Teledyne Continental Motors IO 240B related manuals and publications.

North America:
Other:
Teledyne Continental Motors

P.O. Box 90
Mobile, Alabama
36601
Phone:
334-438-3411
Contact a Teledyne Continental

Motors distributor.
Sensenich Propeller
Model W69EK7-63, W69EK7-63G, W69EK-63 related manuals and publications.
North America:
Sensenich Wood Propeller Company
2008 Wood Court
Plant City, Florida
USA
Phone:
813-752-3711
Fax:
813-752-2818
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 0 - 27
Introduction
Page 0 - 28
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
General
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1.1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 3
1.2
CERTIFICATION BASIS ....................................................................... 3
1.3
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES ................................................ 4
1.4
THREE-VIEW-DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE .................................... 5
1.5
DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................... 6
1.5.1
Overall Dimensions .................................................................. 6
1.5.2
Wing ......................................................................................... 6
1.5.3
Horizontal Stabilizer ................................................................. 6
1.5.4
Landing Gear ........................................................................... 6
1.6
ENGINE ................................................................................................ 7
1.7
PROPELLER ........................................................................................ 7
1.8
FUEL ..................................................................................................... 7
1.9
LUBRICANT AND COOLANT ............................................................... 8

1.9.1
Lubricant .................................................................................. 8
1.10
WEIGHT .............................................................................................. 10
1.11
LIST OF DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS .................................11

1.11.1 Airspeeds ................................................................................11
1.11.2 Meteorological Terms ............................................................. 12
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 1
General
PAGE
1.11.3 Powerplant ..............................................................................12
1.11.4 Flight Performance and Flight Planning ..................................13
1.11.5 Weight and Balance ................................................................13
1.11.6 Equipment ...............................................................................14
1.11.7 Miscellaneous .........................................................................14
1.12
CONVERSION FACTORS ...................................................................15

1.12.1 Length or Altitude ....................................................................15
1.12.2 Speed ......................................................................................15
1.12.3 Pressure ..................................................................................15
1.12.4 Weight .....................................................................................15
1.12.5 Volume ....................................................................................16
Page 1 - 2
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
General
1.1 INTRODUCTION
The Airplane Flight Manual has been prepared to provide pilots and instructors with
information for the safe and efficient operation of this airplane.
This Manual includes the material required by JAR-VLA and Transport Canada
Airworthiness Manual (AWM) Chapter 523-VLA. It also contains supplemental data
supplied by the airplane manufacturer which can be useful to the pilot.
The Flight Manual conforms to a standard equipped DA20-C1 airplane. Any optional
equipment installed on request of the customer (COMM, NAV, etc.) is not considered.
For the operation of optional equipment the Operation Manual of the respective vendor
must be used.
For permissible accessories refer to the Equipment List, Section 6.5.
1.2
CERTIFICATION BASIS
The DA20-C1 has been approved by Transport Canada in accordance with the Canadian
Airworthiness Manual (AWM) Chapter 523-VLA., Type Certificate No. A-191.
Category of Airworthiness:
UTILITY
Noise Certification Basis:
(a) Canadian Airworthiness Manual Chapter 516

(b) FAA Part 36
(c) ICAO Annex 16.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 3
General
1.3 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS AND NOTES

The following definitions apply to warnings, cautions, and notes used in the Flight Manual::
WARNING
A WARNING MEANS THAT THE NON-OBSERVATION OF
THE CORRESPONDING PROCEDURE LEADS TO AN
IMMEDIATE OR IMPORTANT DEGRADATION IN FLIGHT
SAFETY.
CAUTION
A CAUTION MEANS THAT THE NON-OBSERVATION OF
THE CORRESPONDING PROCEDURE LEADS TO A
MINOR OR TO A LONG TERM DEGRADATION IN
FLIGHT SAFETY.
NOTE
A Note draws the attention to any special item not directly
related to safety but which is important or unusual.
Page 1 - 4
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.4
General
THREE-VIEW-DRAWING OF THE AIRPLANE
10890 mm (35 ft 9 in)
1860 mm
(6 ft 1 in)
7240 mm (23 ft 9 in)
1600 mm
(5 ft 3 in)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
2160 mm
(7 ft 1 in)
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 5
General
1.5 DIMENSIONS
1.5.1 Overall Dimensions
Span:
35 ft 9 in
(10.89 m)
Length:
23 ft 9 in
(7.24 m)
Height:
7 ft 1 in
(2.16 m)
1.5.2 WING
Airfoil:
Wortmann FX 63-137/20 HOAC
Wing Area:
125 sq ft (11.6 m2)
Mean Aerodynamic Chord (MAC):
3 ft 6.9 in (1.09 m)
Aspect Ratio:
10.0
Dihedral:
+4 nominal
Sweep of Leading Edge:
+1 nominal
1.5.3 HORIZONTAL STABILIZER

Angle of Incidence :
-4 0.25
Span:
8 ft 9 in (2.66 m)
1.5.4 LANDING GEAR

Track:
6 ft 1 in (1.86 m)
Wheel Base:
5 ft 6 in (1.67 m)
Tire Size:
Tire Pressure:
Page 1 - 6
Nose:
5.00-4, 6 ply
Main:
5.00-5, 6 ply
Nose:
26 psi (1.8 bar)
Main:
33 psi (2.3 bar)
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.6
General
ENGINE
Continental IO 240, naturally aspirated, 4 cylinder, 4 stroke-engine, fuel injected,

horizontally opposed, air cooled.
Propeller drive direct from engine crankshaft.
1.7
Displacement:
239.8 cu.in. (3.9 liters)
Output Power:
125 hp (93.2 kW)
At
2800 RPM
PROPELLER
Two-bladed fixed pitch propeller,

manufactured by Sensenich:
Diameter:
1.8
Model W69EK7-63, W69EK7-63G or

W69EK-63
5 ft 9 in (1.752 m)
FUEL
Approved Fuel Grades:
AVGAS 100 or 100LL
Total Fuel Capacity:
24.5 US gal. (93 liters)
Usable Fuel:
Unusable Fuel:
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 7
General
1.9 LUBRICANT AND COOLANT

1.9.1 Lubricant
Use only the lubricating oils conforming to TCM specifications listed in Service Information
Letter SIL99-2B. See Table 1 below for approved brands.
Table 1
Qualified Lubricating Oil Ashless Dispersant (SAE J 1899)
SUPPLIER
BRAND (if applicable)
BP Oil Corporation
BP Aero Oil
--
Castrol
Castrol Aero AD Oil
--
Castrol Limited ( Australia )
Castrol Aero AD Oil
--
Chevron U.S.A.
Chevron Aero Oil
--
Continental Oil
Conco Aero S
--
Delta Petroleum Company
Delta Avoil Oil
--
Exxon Company, U.S.A.
Exxon Elite
--
Exxon Company, U.S.A.
Exxon Aviation Oil EE
--
Gulf Oil Company
Gulfpride Aviation AD
--
Mobil Oil Company
Mobil Aero Oil
--
NYCO SA
Turbonycoil 3570
--
Pennzoil Company
Pennzoil Aircraft Engine Oil
--
Phillips Petroleum Company
Phillips 66 Aviation Oil
Phillips Petroleum Company
X/C Aviation Multiviscosity Oil
SAE 20W-50, SAE 20W-60
Quaker State Oil & Refining Co.
Quaker State AD Aviation OIL
--
Red Ram Limited (Canada)
Red Ram X/C Aviation Oil
Shell Australia
Aeroshell (R) W
--
Shell Canada Limited
Aeroshell Oil W,
15W-50 Anti-Wear Formulation
Shell U.S.A.
Aeroshell Oil W,
15W-50 Anti-Wear Formulation
Shell U.S.A.
Aeroshell Oil W100 Plus, W80

Plus
--
Sinclair Oil Company
Sinclair Avoil
--
Texaco Inc.
Texaco Aircraft Engine OilPremium AD
--
Total France
Total Aero DM
Union Oil Company of California
Union Aircraft Engine Oil HD
Page 1 - 8
May 15, 2012
TYPE (if applicable)
Type A 100AD, 120 AD
20W-50
15W-50
--
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
General
The viscosity should be selected according to the various climatic conditions using Table 2.
NOTE
When selecting oil, the suppliers documentation must be
consulted to make sure that the oil is appropriate for the
climactic conditions.
Table 2
Use only the oils specified in TCM SIL99-2B.

Oil Capacity:
Maximum
Minimum
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
: 6.0 US qt (5.68 liters)

: 4.0 US qt (3.78 liters)
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 9
General
1.10 WEIGHT
Maximum Ramp Weight
: 1770 lbs (803 kg)
Maximum Take-off Weight
: 1764 lbs (800 kg)
Maximum Landing Weight
: 1764 lbs (800 kg)
Empty Weight
: See Chapter 6
Maximum Weight in Baggage Compartment
: 44 lbs (20 kg)

only if restraining devices available
Wing Loading
At Maximum Take-off Weight
: 14.11 lbs/sq.ft. (68.96 kg/m2)
Performance Load at Maximum Take-off Weight : 14.11 lbs/hp (8.58 kg/kW)
Page 1 - 10
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
General
1.11 LIST OF DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1.11.1 Airspeeds
CAS:
Calibrated Airspeed. Indicated airspeed, corrected for

installation and instrument errors. CAS equals TAS at
standard atmospheric conditions (ISA) at MSL.
GS:
Ground Speed. Speed of the airplane relative to the ground.
IAS:
Indicated Airspeed as shown on an airspeed indicator.
KCAS:
CAS indicated in knots.
KIAS:
IAS indicated in knots.
TAS:
True Airspeed. The speed of the airplane relative to the air.

TAS is CAS corrected for errors due to altitude and
temperature.
VA:
Maneuvering Speed. Maximum speed at which the airplane is

not overstressed at full deflection of control surfaces. Full or
abrupt control surface movement is not permissible above this
speed.
VFE:
Maximum Flaps Extended Speed. This speed must not be

exceeded with the given flap setting.
VNE:
Never Exceed Speed in smooth air. This speed must not be

exceeded in any operation.
VNO:
Maximum Structural Cruising Speed. This speed may be

exceeded only in smooth air, and then only with caution.
VR:
Rotation Speed or Takeoff Speed
VREF:
Reference Speed
VS:
The power-off stall speed with the airplane in its standard

configuration.
VSO:
The power-off stall speed with the airplane in landing

configuration.
VX:
Best Angle-of-Climb Speed.
VY:
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 11
General
1.11.2 Meteorological Terms

AGL:
Above Ground Level
Indicated Pressure
Altitude:
Altitude reading with altimeter set to 1013.25 hPa

(29.92 inHg).
ISA:
International Standard Atmosphere at which air is

identified as a dry gas. The temperature at mean
sea level is 15 C (59 F), the air pressure at sea
level is 1013.25 mbar (29.92 inHg), the temperature
gradient up to the altitude at which the temperature
reaches -56.5 C (-67.9 F) is -0.0065 C/m
(-0.0036 F/ft) and 0 C/m (0 F/ft) above.
OAT:
Outside Air Temperature.
Pressure Altitude:
Altitude measured at standard pressure at MSL

(1013.25 mbar / 29.92 inHg) using a barometric
altimeter. Pressure altitude is the indicated altitude
corrected for installation and instrument errors.
Within this manual the instrument errors are
assumed to be zero.
Aerodrome/Airport
Pressure:
Actual atmospheric pressure at the aerodrome/

airport altitude.
Wind:
The wind speeds used in the diagrams in this

manual should be referred to as headwind or
tailwind components of the measured wind.
1.11.3 Powerplant
Take-off Power:
Maximum engine power for take-off.
Maximum
Continuous Power:
Maximum permissible continuous engine output

power during flight.
Page 1 - 12
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
General
1.11.4 Flight Performance and Flight Planning

Demonstrated
Crosswind
Component:
The maximum speed of the crosswind component at

which the manoeuvrability of the airplane during
take-off and landing has been demonstrated during
type certification test flights.
Service Ceiling:
The altitude at which the maximum rate of climb is

0.5 m/s (100 ft/min.)
1.11.5 Weight and Balance

Reference Datum
(RD):
An imaginary vertical plane from which all horizontal

distances for the center of gravity calculations are
measured. It is the plane through the leading edge
of the wing root rib, perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of the airplane.
Station:
A defined point along the longitudinal axis which is

generally presented as a specific distance from the
reference datum.
Lever Arm:
The horizontal distance from the reference datum to

the center of gravity (of a component).
Moment:
The weight of a component multiplied by its lever

arm.
Center of Gravity
(CG):
Point of equilibrium for the airplane weight.
CG position:
Distance from the reference datum to the CG. It is

determined by dividing the total moment (sum of the
individual moments) by the total weight.
Center of Gravity
Limits:
The CG range within which an airplane with a given

weight must be operated.
Usable Fuel:
The amount of fuel available for the flight plan

calculation.
Unusable Fuel:
The amount of fuel remaining in the tank, which

cannot be safely used in flight.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 13
General
Empty Weight:
Weight of the airplane including unusable fuel, all

operating fluids and maximum amount of oil.
Useful Load:
The difference between take-off weight and empty

weight.
Maximum Take-off
Weight:
Maximum weight permissible for take-off.
1.11.6 Equipment
ACL:
Anti collision light
1.11.7 Miscellaneous
GFRP:
Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic
CFRP:
Carbon Fibre Reinforced Plastic
1.12 CONVERSION FACTORS

1.12.1 Length or Altitude
1 [ft.] = 0.3048 [m]
1 [in.] = 25.4 [mm]
1.12.2 Speed
1 [kts] = 1.852 [km/h]
1 [mph] = 1.609 [km/h]
1.12.3 Pressure
1 [hPa] = 100 [N/m2] = 1 [mbar]
1 [in. Hg] = 33.865 [hPa]
1 [psi] = 68.97 [mbar]
1.12.4 Weight
1 [lbs] = 0.454 [kg]
Page 1 - 14
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
General
1.12.5 Volume
1 [US gallon] = 3.785 [liters]
1 [Imperial gallon] = 4.546 [liters]
CONVERSION CHART - LITERS/US GALLONS
Liter
US Gallon
US Gallon
Liter
1.3
3.8
10
2.6
7.6
15
4.0
15.1
20
5.3
22.7
25
6.6
30.3
30
7.9
10
37.9
35
9.2
12
45.4
40
10.6
14
53.0
45
11.9
16
60.6
50
13.2
18
68.1
60
15.9
20
75.7
70
18.5
22
83.3
80
21.1
24
90.9
90
23.8
26
98.4
100
26.4
28
106.0
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 1 - 15
General
Page 1 - 16
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Operating Limitations
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING LIMITATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
2.1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................... 3
2.2
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS...................................................................... 4
2.3
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS .................................................... 4
2.4
POWER PLANT LIMITATIONS.............................................................. 5

2.4.1
Engine ....................................................................................... 5
2.4.2
Additional for aircraft equipped with altitude

compensating fuel system......................................................... 6
2.4.3
Propeller.................................................................................... 6
2.5
POWER PLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS ........................................ 7
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT MARKINGS.................................... 8
2.7
WEIGHT................................................................................................. 8
2.8
CENTER OF GRAVITY.......................................................................... 9
2.9
APPROVED MANEUVERS ................................................................. 10
2.10
MANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS.......................................................11
2.11
MAXIMUM PASSENGER SEATING .....................................................11
2.12
FLIGHT CREW .....................................................................................11
2.13
KINDS OF OPERATION ...................................................................... 12
2.14
FUEL.................................................................................................... 13
2.15
PLACARDS.......................................................................................... 14
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 1
DOT Approved
PAGE
2.16
DEMONSTRATED CROSSWIND COMPONENT ................................32
2.17
TEMPERATURE LIMITS ......................................................................32
Page 2 - 2
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
2.1
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 2 of this Flight Manual comprises of the operating limitations, instrument

markings, airspeed indicator markings, and the limitation placards which are necessary for
the safe operation of the airplane, its engine, and standard systems and equipment.
The operating limitations in this Chapter and Chapter 9 have been approved by the
Department of Transport (DOT), and must be complied with for all operations.
.
WARNING
ALL LIMITATIONS GIVEN IN THIS CHAPTER MUST BE
COMPLIED WITH FOR ALL OPERATIONS.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 2 - 3
DOT Approved
2.2
AIRSPEED LIMITATIONS
Speed
KIAS
Remarks
106
Do not make full or abrupt control movement

above this speed. Under certain conditions the
airplane may be overstressed by full control
movement.
VFE (Takeoff)
100
Do not exceed this speed with flaps in take-off

position.
VFE (Landing)
78
Do not exceed this speed with flaps in landing

position.
VNO
Maximum Structural
Cruising Speed
118
Do not exceed this speed except in smooth air,

and then only with caution.
VNE
Never Exceed Speed
164
Do not exceed this speed in any operation
VA
Maneuvering Speed
VFE
Maximum Flap Extended
Speed
2.3
AIRSPEED INDICATOR MARKINGS

Marking
KIAS
Explanation
White Arc
34 - 78
Operating range with flaps fully extended.
Green Arc
42 - 118
Normal operating range.
Yellow Arc
118 - 164
Maneuvers must be conducted with caution

and only in smooth air.
Red Line
Page 2 - 4
DOT Approved
164
Maximum permissable speed for all

operating modes.
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
2.4
POWER-PLANT LIMITATIONS
2.4.1 Engine
(a) Engine Manufacturer
: Continental Motors
(b) Engine Type Designation
: IO-240-B
(c) Engine Operating Limitations

Max. T/O Power (5 min.)
: 125 BHP / 93.2 kW
Max. Permissible T/O RPM
: 2800 RPM
Max. Continuous Power
: 125 BHP / 93.2 kW
Max. Permissible Continuous RPM
: 2800 RPM
(d) Oil pressure

Minimum
: 10 psi (1.5 bar)
Maximum
: 100 psi (6.9 bar)

Ambient temperature below
32F (0C), Full power operation
oil pressure 70 psi max
Normal Operating
: 30 psi (2.1 bar) to 60 psi (4.1 bar)
(e) Oil temperature

Minimum
: 75F (24C) Full power

operation, oil temperature
normal 100F (38C)
Maximum :
: 240F (115C)
(f) Cylinder head temperature

Maximum
: 460F (238C)
Minimum
: 240F (115C) takeoff
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 5
DOT Approved
(g) Fuel Specifications

Approved Fuel Grades
: AVGAS 100LL or 100
(h) Oil Grades
: Reference TCM IO-240-B operator

and installation manual (form
X30620) or TCM specification
MHS-24. Refer to Chapter 1,
Section 1.9.1. Lubricant, Table 1.
2.4.2 Additional for aircraft equipped with altitude compensating fuel system.
(a) Mandatory Preflight Idle Mixture Rise
: 50 RPM Minimum: See Normal

Procedures-Before Takeoff
(Section 4.4.6.)
NOTE
Less than 50 RPM Mixture Rise indicates an excessively
lean idle mixture that can result in engine stoppage at idle.
(b) Minimum Ground Idle Speed
: 975 RPM Minimum
NOTE
Recommended minimum flight idle speed 1400 RPM, during
idle power flight conditions and maneuvers.
2.4.3 Propeller (SENSENICH)
(a) Propeller Manufacturer
: Sensenich Propeller, Plant

City/Florida
(b) Propeller Type
: Fixed Pitch W69EK7-63,

W69EK7-63G or W69EK-63
(c) Propeller Diameter
: 69.0 inches (1752mm)
(d) Propeller Pitch (at 3/4 radius)
: 62.8 inches (1595mm)
Page 2 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
2.5
POWERPLANT INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Powerplant instrument markings and their color code significance are shown below:
Instrument
Red Line/
Lower Limit
Green Arc/
Normal
Operating
Range
Tachometer
700 - 2800 RPM
2801 RPM
Oil Temperature
Indicator
75 F
170 - 220 F
75 - 170 F
220 - 240 F
240 F
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Indicator
360 - 420 F
240 - 360 F
420 - 460 F
460 F
Oil Pressure
Indicator
10 psi
30 - 60 psi
RPM > 2100
10 - 30 psi
60 - 100 psi
100 psi
3.5 psi
16.5 psi
3.5 psi
Top of Red Line

(See NOTE)
Fuel Pressure
Indicator
Yellow Arc/
Caution Range
Red Line/
Upper Limit
NOTE
The allowable operating fuel pressure is greater than 32.5
psi. Operation to the top of the Red Line is permitted. This
change is temporary pending installation of modified fuel
pressure gauge.
Powerplant instrument markings for instruments delivered after July 1999.
Instrument
Red Line/
Lower Limit
Green Arc/
Normal
Operating
Range
Yellow Arc/
Caution Range
Red Line/
Upper Limit
Oil Temperature
Indicator
75 F
170 - 220 F
240 F
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Indicator
300 - 420 F
420 - 460 F
460 F
Oil Pressure
Indicator
10 psi
30 - 60 psi
RPM > 2100
100 psi
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 7
DOT Approved
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT MARKINGS
Instrument
Red Arc/
= Lower Limit
Yellow Arc/
= Caution
Range
Voltmeter
8 - 11 Volts
11 - 12.5 Volts
2.7
Green Arc/
= Normal
Operating
Range
Red Line/
= Upper Limit
12.5 - 16.1 Volts
16.1 Volts
WEIGHT
Maximum Ramp Weight
: 1770 lbs (803 kg)
Maximum permissible weight
: 1764 lbs (800 kg)
Maximum permissible weight in the

baggage compartment
(including baggage extension)
: 44 lbs (20 kg) only permissable

with baggage harness
WARNING
EXCEEDING WEIGHT LIMITATIONS MAY LEAD TO
OVERLOADING OF THE AIRPLANE AND CAUSE LOSS
OF
CONTROL
OF
THE
AIRPLANE
AND/OR
STRUCTURAL DAMAGE.
Page 2 - 8
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
2.8
CENTER OF GRAVITY
Points
Gross Weight
Arm (aft of datum)
(lbs)
(kgs)
(in)
(m)
1653
750
7.95
.202
1764
800
8.07
.205
1764
800
12.16
.309
1653
750
12.48
.317
WARNING
EXCEEDING THE CENTER OF GRAVITY LIMITATIONS
REDUCES THE MANEUVERABILITY AND STABILITY OF
THE AIRPLANE.
The procedure used to determine the center of gravity is described in Chapter 6.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 2 - 9
DOT Approved
2.9
APPROVED MANEUVERS
This airplane is certified in the UTILITY Category in accordance with Canadian

Airworthiness Manual Chapter 523-VLA.
Permissible Utility Category Maneuvers:
(a) All normal flight maneuvers
(b) The following maneuvers in which the angle of bank is not more than 60:
Lazy Eights
Entry speed
: 116 KIAS
Chandelles
Entry speed
: 116 KIAS
Steep turns
(c) Spinning NOT approved for aircraft equipped with altitude compensating fuel
system.
(d) Spinning (with Wing Flaps UP) approved for aircraft NOT equipped with altitude
compensating fuel system.
Note removed.
(e) Stalls NOT approved for aircraft equipped with altitude compensating fuel
system and not in compliance with MSB DAC1-73-05 latest approved revision.
(f) Stalls (except whip stalls) approved for aircraft NOT equipped with altitude
compensating fuel system.
(g) Stalls (except whip stalls) approved for aircraft equipped with altitude
compensating fuel system in compliance with MSB DAC1-73-05 latest
approved revision.
(h) Intentional Side Slips, except as required for landings, NOT approved for
aircraft equipped with altitude compensating fuel system and not in compliance
with MSB DAC1-73-05 latest approved revision.
NOTE
Aerobatics are prohibited.
Page 2 - 10
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
2.10 MANEUVERING LOAD FACTORS

Table of structural maximum permissible load factors:
at VA
VNE
with flaps in T/O

or LDG position
Positive
+ 4.4
+ 4.4
+ 2.0
Negative
- 2.2
- 2.2
WARNING
EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM LOAD FACTORS WILL
RESULT IN OVERSTRESSING OF THE AIRPLANE.
SIMULTANEOUS FULL DEFLECTION OF MORE THAN
ONE
CONTROL
SURFACE
CAN
RESULT
IN
OVERSTRESSING OF THE STRUCTURE, EVEN AT
SPEEDS BELOW THE MANEUVERING SPEED.
2.11 MAXIMUM PASSENGER SEATING

Maximum Passenger Seating
: one passenger.
2.12 FLIGHT CREW

Minimum Flight Crew
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
: one pilot.
May 15, 2012
Page 2 - 11
DOT Approved
2.13 KINDS OF OPERATION

Flights are permissible in accordance with visual flight rules.
Minimum Equipment, Flight and Navigation Instruments:
Airspeed Indicator
Altimeter
Attitude Gyro (Artificial Horizon)
(not mandatory for Day-VFR only)
Outside Air Temperature Indicator
(mandatory for Night-VFR only)
Vertical Speed Indicator
Magnetic Compass
Turn and Bank Indicator
Directional Gyro

Minimum Equipment, Powerplant Instruments:

Fuel Quantity Indicator
Fuel Pressure Indicator
Oil Pressure Indicator
Oil Temperature Indicator
Cylinder Head Temperature Indicator
Tachometer
Voltmeter
Ammeter
Generator Warning Light
Minimum Equipment, Lighting:
Instrument Lighting
Instrument Panel and Map Lighting
Landing Light
Position and Anti-Collision Lights
Illuminated Placards

(mandatory for Night-VFR operations
in EASA member countries)
NOTE
Additional equipment may be required for compliance with
specific operational or specific national requirements. It is
the operators responsibility to ensure compliance with any
such specific equipment requirements.
Page 2 - 12
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
2.14 FUEL
Fuel Capacity
Total Fuel Quantity:
: 24.5 US gal. (93.0 liters)
Usable Fuel:
: 24.0 US gal. (91.0 liters)
Unusable Fuel:
: 0.5 US gal. (2.0 liters)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 13
DOT Approved
Page 2 - 14
DOT Approved
DO NOT PUSH ON SPINNER
EXTERNAL
POWER
14 VOLTS
STEP
BELOW
NOTE: One of the Placards is

installed on the airplane
UNLATCH BOTH SIDES
AND LIFT UP CANOPY
TO OPEN CANOPY
UNLATCH
February 12, 2013

UNLOCK
LOCK
DO NOT CLOSE CANOPY

IN LOCKED POSITION
LOCK UNLOCK
1. OPEN WINDOW, UNLOCK HANDLE

2. UNLOCK OPPOSITE SIDE AND
LIFT UP CANOPY
LATCH
TO OPEN
CANOPY:
OPEN
TO LIFT CANOPY
OPEN BOTH SIDES
GROUND
REFUELING
Fuel Drains Located Underneath.

Ground Aircraft before Refueling.
USABLE 75L/19.8 US gal.
77L/20.3 US gal. AVGAS 100LL
USABLE 80.5L/21.3 US gal.
95L/25 US gal. AVGAS 100LL
USABLE 91L/24.0 US gal.

2.15 PLACARDS
The following placards must be installed on the airplane:

(a) On the exterior of the airplane - Upper surfaces placards and markings.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
TO LIFT CANOPY
OPEN BOTH SIDES
OPEN
HERE
ELT
TO OPEN
CANOPY:
UNLATCH
LATCH
UNLATCH BOTH SIDES

AND LIFT UP CANOPY
DE LA RADIOBALISE
DE DETRESSE
EMPLACEMENT
ICIL
INSTALLED HERE
EMERGENCY
LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
1. OPEN WINDOW, UNLOCK HANDLE

2. UNLOCK OPPOSITE SIDE AND
LIFT UP CANOPY
TO OPEN CANOPY
STEP
BELOW
CAUTION
6.0 US Qts.
5.68 I
February 12, 2013
UNLOCK
LOCK
(BAFFLE SHOULD BE INSTALLED BELOW -5C /+23F)
WINTER KIT MUST BE REMOVED ABOVE 12.5C /+54.5F)
INSTALL EITHER INLET BAFFLES ONLY OR OUTLET BAFFLES ONLY
FOR TEMPERATURES BETWEEN 0 0 C/32 0 F AND 12.5 0 C/54.5 0 F
INLET AND OUTLET BAFFLES MUST BE REMOVED ABOVE 12.5 0 C/54.5 0 F
FLIGHT MANUAL
OR ACCORDING TO
SAE 20W-50
OIL
USE ONLY AVIATION

GRADE OIL!

(b) On the exterior of the airplane - Upper surfaces placards and markings.
Page 2 - 15
DOT Approved
(c) On the exterior of the airplane - Lower surfaces placards and markings.
NOTE: The Placards and Markings shown are on the lower

surfaces of the airplane.
Page 2 - 16
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
(d) On the exterior of the airplane - Lower surfaces placards and markings.
NOTE: The Placards and Markings shown are on the lower

surfaces of the airplane.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 17
DOT Approved
80
KNOTS
STROBE
LANDING
NO PITCH
INFORMATIO N
2 MIN.
TURN COORDINATOR
PITOT
MIC
D.C.
ELEC.
60
TAXI
PUSH
POSITION
33
LIG HTS
MAP
LT
ET
INSTRUMENT
CONTROL
DAVTR ON
SELECT
GMT
12:45
CHRONOMETER
M800
OFF
ON
EPU
100
40
Maneuvering speed V = 104kts
120
140
AIRSPEED
160
S C OU
N I
T
24
21
30
BRIGHT
DIM
No smoking!
No smoking!
Maneuvering speed V =A 106kts
NOSE DOWN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
February 12, 2013

15
Page 2 - 18
DOT Approved
0
10
15
DOWN
10
100 FEET PER MINUTE
UP VERTICAL SPEED
21 S
15
15
20
20
TRIM
G
E
N
C
A
N
O
P
Y
AVIONIC
MASTER
FUEL
PUMP
OBS
20
RPM
HUNDREDS
1
10
S
T
A
R
T
OFF
ON
GEN/BAT
E
P
U
PULL
TEST
TSO
ON
Flaps
OFF
SBY
BENDIX/KING
TST
ALT
BENDIX/KING
OFF
KX 125
S
B
Y
INDENT
COMM
S
B
PULL
25K
OBS
FLAG
Volu me
Push-On
TO
FR
ALL
ISO
PULL
IDENT
S
B
Y
KT 76A TSO
PULL
OBS
Squelch
PM 501
NAV
S
B
10
16
14
EGT
x100F
VDO
75
240
A309F
FUEL
220
VDO
AMPS
VDO
FAHRENHEIT
60
+
VDO
VDO
10 12
VOLT
VDO
14
60
OIL
30
16
80
HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 0 0
10
600
34
1
lbs./sq.inch
14
VDO
OIL
170
F
360 420
460
Cylinder Head
Temp.
240
VDO
100
Usable
74L/19.5 US gal.
VDO
FUEL/FLOW
US.GAL/HR
10
6 8
4
12
25 35 40
15
45
05 LITERS/HR
60
-
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP.
50
BATTERY
MARKER
25
MASTER
STROBE
FLAPS
START
50
GEN.
ELECTRICAL
ADF
ICS
HSI
ATC
INST.
AVIONICS
GEN.
CONTROL
AVIONICS
DME
MASTER
CONTROL
LIG HTS
SYSTEM
TURN
FUEL QTY.
&
O.A.T.
SLIP
EG T
OIL TEMP
LANDING TAXI/MAP
TRIM
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
10
NAV/CO M
1
10
POSITIO N
FUEL
PUMP
This aeroplane i s class ified as a v ery light

aeroplane approved for day and night VFR only, in
non-icing conditions. All aerobatic manoeuvres
except for intentinal spinning which is permitted
with flaps UP only, are prohibited. See Flight Manual
for other limitations.
GPS
PULSE LIGHT
PITOT
HEAT
For aircraft operated in EASA member countries only.
30
25
5 0 0 HOURS 0
3
35
10
15
Note: The content of this label changes for

different countries.
This airplane i s class ifi ed as a v ery light airplane
ap pr ov ed for V i s u a l M e t e o r o l o g i c a l C o n d i t i o n s onl y,
in non-icing conditions. All aerobatic maneuvers, except for
intentional spinning which is permitted with flaps UP only,
are prohibited. See Flight Manual for other limitations.
This airplane is classified as a very light

airplane approved for VFR only, in non-icing
conditions.
All aerobatic maneuvers,
except for intentional spinning which is
NOSE DOWN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
GPS limited for VFR only.
TRIM
Usable
80.5 L/21.3 US gal.
Usable
91 L/24 US gal.
(e) On the instrument panel - Up to airplane serial number C0149.
12
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
EPU
80
KNOTS
STROBE
MIC
PITOT
STROBE
LANDING
NO PITCH
INFORMATIO N
2 MIN.
TURN COORDINATOR
TAXI
30
LIG HTS
MAP
INSTRUMENT
OFF
ON
BRIGHT
DIM
No smoking!
10
DOWN
10
100 FEET PER MINUTE
15
15
20
AVIONIC
MASTER
February 12, 2013
20
RPM
HUNDREDS
OFF
ON
1
10
S
T
A
R
T
30
25
E
P
U
PULL
TEST
TSO
OFF
ON
ON
TST
ALT
INS
Flaps
OFF
SBY
BENDIX/KING
BENDIX/KING
OFF
KX 125
S
B
Y
PULL
25K
OBS
OFF
ON
GEN/BAT
INDENT
COMM
S
B
FLAG
Volu me
Push-On
TO
FR
ALL
ISO
PULL
IDENT
S
B
Y
KT 76A TSO
PULL
OBS
Squelch
PM 501
NAV
S
B
10
16
14
EGT
x100F
VDO
75
240
A309F
1
2
FUEL
220
VDO
VDO
AMPS
VDO
VDO
VDO
10 12
VOLT
14
16
80
LDG
LDG
BRIGHT
T/O
DIM
50
BATTERY
MARKER
25
MASTER
STROBE
CRUISE
HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 0 0
60
OIL
30
FLAPS
START
T/O
CRUISE
FAHRENHEIT
60
+
10
600
34
1
lbs./sq.inch
14
VDO
OIL
170
F
360 420
460
Cylinder Head
Temp.
240
VDO
100
Usable
74L/19.5 US gal.
VDO
FUEL/FLOW
US.GAL/HR
6 8
10
4
12
25 35 40
15
05 LITERS/HR
45
60
-
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP.
50
GEN.
ELECTRICAL
ADF
ICS
HSI
ATC
INST.
AVIONICS
GEN.
CONTROL
AVIONICS
DME
MASTER
CONTROL
LIG HTS
SYSTEM
TURN
FUEL QTY.
&
O.A.T.
SLIP
EG T
OIL TEMP
LANDING TAXI/MAP
TRIM
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
10
NAV/CO M
1
10
POSITIO N
FUEL
PUMP
Flaps
GPS
PULSE LIGHT
PITOT
HEAT
EGT/CHT EGT/CHT AUTOTRACK FUEL/COMP FLIGHT

ON/OFF
MODE
DATA
DIGITAL
GRAPH
Optional VM 1000
MicroVision Installation
MAP
FUEL
PUMP
GEN/BAT
LIGHTS
POSITION
Note: The content of this

Placard changes for
different installed equipment.
TAXI
C
A
N
O
P
Y
5 0 0 HOURS 0
3
35
FUEL
PUMP
OBS
15
10
20
G
E
N

conditions.
AVIONIC
MASTER
15
UP VERTICAL SPEED
21 S
TRIM
POSITION
PUSH
12
LANDING
33
CONTROL
ET
D.C.
ELEC.
60
LT
DAVTR ON
SELECT
GMT
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
NOSE DOWN
PITOT
HEAT
MIC
EPU
100
40
120
140
AIRSPEED
160
N I
S CT OU
21
M800
15
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
W
24
CHRONOMETER
12:45

(f) On the instrument panel - Up to airplane serial number C0149.
Page 2 - 19
DOT Approved
Page 2 - 20
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
OFF FOR NORMAL FLIGHT
OFF
PRIME
No smoking!
DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN
PROPELLER
IS MOVING.
SERIOUS ENGINE
DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
CAUTION!
GROUND
OPERATION.
NOSE DOWN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
TRIM
Usable
91 L/24 US gal.
This aeroplane i s class ifi ed as a v ery light

aeroplane approved for day and night VFR only, in
non-icing conditions. All aerobatic manoeuvres
except for intentinal spinning which is permitted
with flaps UP only, are prohibited. See Flight Manual
for other limitations.
For aircraft operated in EASA member countries only.
This airplane is classified as a very light airplane

approved for Visual Meteorological Conditions only,
in non-icing conditions. All aerobatic maneuvers,
except for intentional spinning which is permitted
with flaps UP only, are prohibited. See Flight
Manual for other limitations.
Note: The content of this label changes for

different countries.
(g) On the instrument panel - Airplane serial number C0150 and subs.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
AUTO
PILOT
EPU
February 12, 2013

LANDING
TAXI
POSITION
STROBE
LIGHTS
MAP
OFF
ON
INSTRUMENT
FLOOD
AVIONIC
MASTER
Optional VM 1000 MicroVision Installation
Note: The content of this Placard changes

for different installed equipment.
PULSE
NOTE: Only installed if Auto Pilot

is installed.
AUTOPILOT MAX. OPERATING SPEED 148 KIAS

A/P OPS PROHIBITED FOR T/O & LDG
MAX FLAP T/O (15 ) WITH A/P ON
FUEL
PUMP
OFF
ON
LDG
T/O
CRUISE
Flaps
1. Fuel Pump
2. Mixture
3. Throttle
ON
FULL RICH
IDLE
For Idle Power Operation:
VFE (T/O) 100 KTS.

VFE (LDG) 78 KTS.
EGT/CHT EGT/CHT AUTOTRACK FUEL/COMP FLIGHT

ON/OFF
MODE
DATA
DIGITAL
GRAPH
GEN/BAT
14VDC ACCESSORY PWR.

GROUND OPS. ONLY 2A MAX

(h) On the instrument panel - Airplane serial number C0150 and subs.
Page 2 - 21
DOT Approved
(i) On the instrument panel - Circuit Breakers.
TRIM
NOSE UP
M800
CHRONOMETER
12:45
GMT
5
4
LT
SELECT
S UC I ON
T
G
E
N
NEUTRAL
NOSE DOWN
21 S
ET
15
C
A
N
O
P
Y
S
T
A
R
T
E
P
U
F
10
16
DAVTRON
No smoking!
AIRSPEED
KNOTS
120
40
10
20
RPM
HUNDREDS
TSO
TO
FR
VDO
FLAG
NAV
PULL
25K
PULL
IDENT
PULL
OBS
0
BENDIX/KING
25
US.GAL/HR
8
10
4 6
12
35
40
15 25
5
45
0 LITERS/HR
1
10
80
3
4
1
1
Usable
74L/19.5 US gal.
VDO
VDO
START
F UEL
14
0
FUEL/FLOW
1
30
5 0 0 HOURS 0 0
3
35
60
100
600
Cylinder Head
Temp.
S
B
Y
COMM
PULL
TEST
OFF
S
B
OBS
KX 125
15
360 420
460
240
100
EGT
x100F
VDO
4
S
B
S
B
Y
160
140
14
8
6

conditions.
CONTROL
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
EGT
OIL PRESS OIL TEMP
TACH .
FLAPS
TRIM
SYSTEM
TURN
FUEL QTY.
&
O.A.T.
SLIP
FUEL
PUMP
PITOT
HEAT
lbs./sq.inch
LIG HTS
BENDIX/KING
SBY
33
30
12
24
10
240
VDO
VDO
20
AMPS
VOLT
DOWN
15
21
PITOT
STROBE
LANDING
60
-
15
10
OBS
PUSH
TAXI
POSITIO N
LIG HTS
MAP
AVIONIC
MASTER
INSTRUMENT
60
+
10
MASTER
CONTROL
ICS
ATC
NAV/CO M
1
25
10
ADF
HSI
MARKER
DME
VDO
GEN/BAT
ELECTRICAL
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP.
ON
Push-On
Volu me
OFF
BRIGHT
GPS
AVIONICS
16
ISO
PM 501
ALL
Flaps
BATTERY
GEN.
GEN.
CONTROL
50
50
VDO
0 0 0 0 0 0
OFF
PULSE LIGHT
FUEL
PUMP
DIM
ON
POSITIO N
MASTER
10 12 14
INST.
LANDING TAXI/MAP
80
AVIONICS
VDO
EPU
STROBE
60
OIL
2 MIN.
INDENT
20
TURN COORDINATOR
NO PITCH
INFORMATIO N
30
220
OIL
UP VERTICAL SPEED
100 FEET PER MINUTE
170
75
TST
15
OFF
KT 76A TSO
ALT
10
D.C.
ELEC.
ON
Squelch
A309F
HOURS 1/10
FAHRENHEIT
MIC
START
FLAPS
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
EGT
OIL PRESS
OIL TEMP
TRIM
TACH.
SYSTEM
TURN
FUEL/QTY.
&
O.A.T.
SLIP
FUEL
PUMP
PITOT
HEAT
LIGHTS
STROBE
LANDING
MAP/TAXI
INST.
POSITION
PULSE LIGHT
Note: The content of the Avionics Placard

changes depending on installed equipment.
Note: The content of the Avionics Placard
changes depending on installed equipment.
ELECTRICAL
BATTERY
GEN.
BATTERY
GEN.
GEN.
CONTROL
ELECTRICAL
Page 2 - 22
DOT Approved
GEN.
CONTROL
AUX
POWER
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Usable
76 L / 20 US gal.
ON
FULL RICH
IDLE
For Idle Power Operation:

1. Fuel Pump
2. Mixture
3. Throttle
NOSE UP
NOSE DOWN
NEUTRAL
TRIM
OFF
PRIME
No smoking!
DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN
PROPELLER
IS MOVING.
SERIOUS ENGINE
DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
CAUTION!
GROUND
OPERATION.

(j) Reversed instrument panel installation.
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 23
DOT Approved
Page 2 - 24
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013

approved for Visual Meteorological Conditions only,
in non-icing conditions. All aerobatic maneuvers,
with flaps UP only, are prohibited. See Flight
LDG
T/O
CRUISE
VFE (T/O) 100 KTS.

VFE (LDG) 78 KTS.
Flaps
GEN/BAT
OFF
ON
MAP
FUEL
PUMP
OFF
ON
INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS
AVIONIC
MASTER
STROBE
POSITION
TAXI
LANDING
EPU
(k) Reversed instrument panel installation.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
(l) Reversed instrument panel installation - Circuit Breakers.
START
FLAPS
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
EGT
OIL PRESS
OIL TEMP
SYSTEM
TURN
FUEL/QTY.
&
O.A.T.
SLIP
TRIM
TACH.
SYSTEM
LIGHTS
STROBE
LANDING
INST.
TAXI/MAP
PITOT
HEAT
FUEL
PUMP
POSITION
HORIZON
DG
AVIONICS
MASTER
MASTER
CONTROL
ICS
COM2
ATC
COM1
AVIONICS
GPS2
CDI
GPS/NAV
1
EQUIP
COOLING
ELECTRICAL
GEN.
GEN.
BATTERY
CONTROL
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 2 - 25
DOT Approved
Page 2 - 26
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013

PULSE LANDING
TAXI
LIGHTS
POSITION
STROBE
MAP
INSTRUMENT LT.
ON
OFF
L
BOTH
G
E
N
START
CAUTION! GROUND OPS.

DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN PROP IS MOVING.
OFF
NOSE DN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
E
P
U
FUEL PRIME
S
T
A
R
T
NORMAL FLIGHT - OFF
C
A
N
O
P
Y
20
RPM
HUNDREDS
ON
OFF
25
1101
GEN/BAT
HOURS
50 0 0 0 0
3
35
15
10
30
AVIONIC
MASTER
COM
OFF/
VOL
PUSH
ID
FUEL
PUMP
VFR
IDENT
GARMIN
VLOC
ALT
ON
119.80
COM/
VOL
PULL SQUELCH
COMM
PUSH
C/V
VOL/
VOL/ PUSH
SQ
PWR
HI
LO
MRK
MUTE
80
SENS
GARMIN
PILOT
A OM
GARMIN
100
VFE (T/O)
100 KTS.
VFE (LDG)
78 KTS.
OBS
This aeroplane is classified as a

very light aeroplane approved for
day and night VFR only, in
non-icing conditions. All aerobatic
maneuvers except for intentional
spinning which is permitted with
flaps UP only, are prohibited.
See Flight Manual for other
limitations.
NO SMOKING
mb
1200
4
975
K
t
n
m
Flaps
12300
PRESSURE ALT
f
t
DEFAULT
NAV
CLR
START
STOP
TEST
GMA 340
28.8
28.7
28.6
GNS 430
COPILOT
CLR
CRSR
GTX 330
PUSH
CRSR
GPS
ENT
MENU
RNG
PASS
VOL
VOL
PULL
COM
IN.Hg
FUNC
SL40
PROC
APOLLO
FPL
165
GS
000
TKE
4.85
DIS
KHPN
WPT
CREW
PILOT
PA
ICS ISOLATION
ADF
FEET
SPKR
CABIN AUDIO
DME
CALIBRATED
TO
20.000 FEET
NAV2
970
8 ALT
NAV
COM
1/2
NAV1
MSG
KHPN
MON RCL MEM
FLAP SPEEDS
ALT
R
EC
COM3
COM3
MIC
s121.50
CDI
GPS
TERM
108.00
117.95
VLOC
136.975
118.000
COS
COM2
COM2
MIC
COM1
MIC
60
COM1
KNOTS
AIRSPEED 40
160
140
120
100
Usable
91L / 24 US gal.
BY
ST
For aircraft operated in European Aviation Safety

Agency (EASA) member countries only.
EPU
T
R
I
M
NOSE DN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
OFF
AUTO
PILOT
MANEUVERING SPEED V = 106kts
T
R
I
M
220
VDO
AMPS
VDO
OIL
170
VDO
FUEL
60
+
240
6 9 12
16.5
PSI
125
145
165
420
F
300
1
4
Usable
1
2
FUEL
VDO
10
60
VDO
1
1
600
16
100
10 12 14
VOLT
VDO
OIL
30
lbs./sq.inch
VDO
460
81L/21.4 US gal.
200
Cylinder Head
Temp.
100
50
BATTERY
FLAPS
20
MASTER
EQUIP
COOLING
TAXI/MAP
50
GEN.
ELECTRICAL
AUX.
POWER
10
FUEL
PUMP
ATC
AVIONICS
STROBE
GEN.
CONTROL
FUEL/QTY.
ICS
TAS
AVIONICS
10
POSITION
LIGHTS
NO SMOKING
SYSTEM
TRIM
MASTER
CONTROL
DATA
LINK
INST.
7.5
PFD
START
COM1
LANDING

approved for Visual Meteorological Conditions
only, in non-icing conditions. All aerobatic
maneuvers, except for intentional spinning which
is permitted with flaps UP only, are prohibited.
See Flight Manual for other limitations.
ADC
AHRS
COM2
EGT
OIL TEMP
GPS/NAV
1
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS

HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 3 0
VDO
NO SMOKING
This airplane is classified as as very light airplane

a p p r o v e d f o r Vi s u a l M e t e o r o l o g i c a l C o n d i t i o n s
o n l y, i n n o n - i c i n g c o n d i t i o n s . A l l a e r o b a t i c
i s p e r m i t t e d w i t h f l a p s U P o n l y, a r e p r o h i b i t e d .
See flight Manual for other Iimitations.
This aeroplane is classified as a very light

aeroplane approved for day and night VFR only,
in non-icing conditions. All aerobatic maneuvers
with flaps UP ony, are prohibited. See Flight
TO
PU L L
LIGHTS
CA GE
COM2
X
TRIM
FLAPS
X
ELECTRICAL
AUX.
POWER
X
GEN.
CONTROL
X
GEN.
FUEL
PUMP
BATTERY
FUEL/QTY.
SYSTEM
X
AHRS
X
X
X
ADC
PFD
START
EGT
OIL TEMP
X
X
X
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
GPS/NAV
1
COM1
ATC
X
X
AVIONICS
ICS
MASTER
CONTROL
AH
SYSTEM
X
X
MASTER
LANDING
STROBE
TAS
AVIONICS
X
DATA
LINK
POSITION
INST.
This aeroplane is classified as a

very light aeroplane approved for
maneuvers except for intentional
limitations.
NO SMOKING
EQUIP
COOLING
TAXI/MAP
O
F
F

HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 3 0
VDO
G500 with Backup Artificial Horizon
60
-
75
105
x10
EGT
85
3.5
25
45
65
21 S 15
For aircraft operated in

EASA member countries
(m) Instrument panel with Garmin G500 installation. Refer to Supplement 13.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
AUTO
EPU
PULSE LANDING
TAXI
EPU
TAXI
POSITION
PULSE LANDING
STROBE
MAP
STROBE
LIGHTS
POSITION
R
L
BOTH
START

DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN PROP IS MOVING.
OFF
G
E
N
E
P
U
FUEL PRIME
S
T
A
R
T
NORMAL FLIGHT - OFF
C
A
N
O
P
Y
25
ON
OFF
GEN/BAT
HOURS
50 0 0 0 0
3
35
1101
30
AVIONIC
MASTER
February 12, 2013

MAP
PUSH
ID
FUEL
PUMP
VFR
IDENT
GARMIN
HI
LO
COM2
MIC
ALT
EC
VFE (T/O)
100 KTS.
VFE (LDG)
78 KTS.
OBS
3
5
START
100
n
m
CLR
FUNC
DEFAULT
NAV
START
STOP
GNS 430
NORMAL FLIGHT
OFF
CLR
CRSR
GTX 330
PUSH
CRSR
GPS
ENT
MENU
RNG
PASS
VOL
VOL
PULL
TEST
GMA 340
28.8
28.7
28.6
COPILOT
FUEL PRIME
Flaps
12300
PRESSURE ALT
f
t
SL40
PROC
K
t
000
165
APOLLO
FPL
4.85
DIS
TKE
GS
1
IN.Hg
COM
CREW
PILOT
KHPN
WPT
PA
ICS ISOLATION
ADF
FEET
SPKR
CABIN AUDIO
DME
CALIBRATED
TO
20.000 FEET
NAV2
970
FOR IDLE POWER OPS.

FUEL PUMP
ON
MIXTURE
FULL RICH
IDLE
THROTTLE
975
8 ALT
NAV
COM
1/2
1200
MON RCL MEM
mb
NAV1
MSG
KHPN
COM3
MIC
COM3
s121.50
CDI
GPS
TERM
108.00
117.95
VLOC
136.975
118.000
COS
COM1
MIC
FLAP SPEEDS
BOTH
ALT
ON
119.80
VLOC
SENS
COM/
VOL
PULL SQUELCH
COMM
PUSH
C/V
VOL/
VOL/ PUSH
SQ
PWR
COM2
60
COM1
CAUTION GROUND OPS

DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN PROP IS MOVING
OFF
ON
FULL RICH
IDLE
COM
OFF/
VOL
MRK
MUTE
GARMIN
PILOT
A OM
GARMIN
80
KNOTS
100
120
AIRSPEED 40
160
140
BY
ST
OFF
ON
INSTRUMENT LT.
FUEL PUMP
MIXTURE
THROTTLE
FOR IDLE POWER OPS.
INSTRUMENT LT.
ON
OFF
NOSE DN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
20
RPM
HUNDREDS
OFF
AUTO
PILOT
T
R
I
M
15
10
60
-
75
x10
220
VDO
1
4
Usable
1
2
FUEL
VDO
60
AVIONIC
MASTER
GEN.
BATTERY
GEN / BAT
GEN.
CONTROL
ON
FUEL/QTY.
TRIM
ICS
TAS
AVIONICS
POSITION
SYSTEM
MASTER
CONTROL
50
GEN.
AVIONICS
AUX.
POWER
FUEL
PUMP
ATC
AVIONICS
STROBE
ELECTRICAL
AUX.
POWER
10
FUEL
PUMP
ATC
AVIONICS
STROBE
GEN.
CONTROL
FUEL/QTY.
ICS
TAS
AVIONICS
10
POSITION
LIGHTS
NO SMOKING
SYSTEM
TRIM
MASTER
CONTROL
DATA
LINK
INST.
LIGHTS
50
BATTERY
FLAPS
20
MASTER
EQUIP
COOLING
TAXI/MAP
AHRS
PFD
START
COM1
LANDING
ADC
COM2
EGT
OIL TEMP
GPS/NAV
1
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
FUEL
PUMP
7.5
PFD
START
COM1
LANDING

approved for Visual Meteorological Conditions
only, in non-icing conditions. All aerobatic
is permitted with flaps UP only, are prohibited.
See Flight Manual for other limitations.
NO SMOKING
Spinning is prohibited
Operations in IMC are prohibited
Operations by night are prohibited
Operations is known or forcasting icing
conditions are prohibited
FLAPS
MASTER
DATA
LINK
EQUIP
COOLING
VDO
16
100
10 12 14
VOLT
VDO
OIL
30
1
1
600
INST.
10
lbs./sq.inch
VDO
460
81L/21.4 US gal.
200
Cylinder Head
Temp.
100
420
F
300
TAXI/MAP
60
+
240
OFF
AMPS
VDO
OIL
170
VDO
FUEL
6 9 12
16.5
PSI
145
125
165
105
EGT
85
3.5
25
45
65
21 S 15
VDO
ADC
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
GPS/NAV
1
COM2
VRS (LDG)
75 KTS.
Vrs (T/O)
100 KTS.
FLAP SPEEDS
AHRS
EGT
OIL TEMP

HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 3 0


(n) Instrument panel with Garmin G500 installation. Refer to Supplement 13.
Page 2 - 27
DOT Approved
(o) Instrument panel with Garmin G500, UMA engine instruments and Garmin GTN
650/GTR 225installed
Page 2 - 28
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
(p) Instrument panel with Garmin G500, UMA engine instruments and Garmin GTN
650/GTR 225installed
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 2 - 29
DOT Approved
Page 2 - 30
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
UNLOCK
OPEN

LOCK
CLOSE
CLOSE
TO LIFT CANOPY
OPEN BOTH
OPEN
SIDES
TO OPEN CANOPY
UNLOCK BOTH HANDLES

RESCUE
HAMMER
MIC
HEADSET
CO-PILOT
ON
ON
OFF
ARM
MIC
OFF
ONLY WITH BAGGAGE NET
MAX BAGGAGE - 44 lbs (20kg)
HEADSET
PILOT
HEADSET
MIC
HEADSET
MIC
HEADSET
HEADSET
(q) Airplane interior - General placards and markings.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
THROTTLE TENSION
TO OPEN CANOPY
UNLOCK BOTH HANDLES
February 28, 2014
LOCK
CLOSE
CLOSE

UNLOCK
OPEN
TO LIFT CANOPY
OPEN BOTH
OPEN
SIDES


(r) Airplane interior - General placards and markings.
Page 2 - 31
DOT Approved
(s) Airplane interior - General placards and markings.
(Leather Seats)
55
(Sheepskin Seats)
55
Hydraulic Fluid 4
MIL-H-5606
Hydraulic Fluid
MIL-H-5606
ALTERNATE
AIR
Page 2 - 32
DOT Approved
POWER
FUEL
MIXTURE
OFF FULL RICH
OFF FULL RICH
February 28, 2014
OFF FULL RICH
OFF FULL RICH
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
(t) Around the ignition switch on

the instrument panel.
Optional Ignition Switch

(Push-to-Start Feature)
AC S
(u) On the instrument panel. If equipped with an altitude compensating fuel pump.
(v) On the instrument panel. If equipped with an altitude compensating fuel pump.
(w) On the instrument panel. If equipped with an altitude compensating fuel pump.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 2 - 33
DOT Approved
2.16 DEMONSTRATED CROSSWIND COMPONENT

The maximum demonstrated crosswind component is 20 kts. (37 km/h).
2.17 TEMPERATURE LIMITS

CAUTION
FOR AIRCRAFT WITH OTHER THAN WHITE
UNDERSIDES. PARKING THE AIRCRAFT OVER A LIGHT
COLOURED
OR
REFLECTIVE
SURFACE
IN
CONDITIONS OF BRIGHT SUNLIGHT, PARTICULARLY
AT HIGH OAT, IS NOT RECOMMENDED.
Temperature limit of the structure for the operation of the airplane:
Maximum T/O Temperature
Page 2 - 34
DOT Approved
: 131F (55C)
Structural Temperature
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Emergency Procedures
CHAPTER 3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
3.1
INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... 3
3.2
AIRSPEEDS DURING EMERGENCY PROCEDURES............................3
3.3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES - CHECKLISTS.......................................4

3.3.1
Engine Failures ....................................................................... 4
3.3.2
Gliding ..................................................................................... 9
3.3.3
Emergency Landing ................................................................ 9
3.3.4
Fire ........................................................................................ 12
3.3.5
Icing ...................................................................................... 15
3.3.6
Recovery from Unintentional Spin ........................................ 16
3.3.7
Landing with Defective Tire on Main Landing Gear .............. 16
3.3.8
Electrical Power Failure ........................................................ 17
3.3.9
Flap System Failure .............................................................. 19
3.3.10
Starter Relay Failure ............................................................. 19
3.3.11
Avionics System Failure ........................................................ 20
3.3.12
Trim System Failure .............................................................. 21
3.3.13
Instrument Panel Lighting Failure ......................................... 22
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 1
DOT Approved
Page 3 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.1
INTRODUCTION
The following chapter contains check-lists as well as descriptions of the
recommended procedures in case of an emergency. However, engine failure or
other airplane related emergency situations will most likely never occur if the
mandatory pre-flight check and maintenance are performed properly.
In the event that an emergency situation does appear, the procedures presented in
this manual should be used to rectify such problems. Since it is impossible to
present in the Flight Manual all emergency situations which may occur, knowledge
of the airplane and experience of the pilot are essential in rectifying any problems.
3.2
AIRSPEEDS DURING EMERGENCY PROCEDURES

KIAS
Engine failure after take-off with flaps in T/O position
60
Maneuvering Speed
106
Airspeed for best glide angle

Maximum Gross Weight 1764 lbs (800 kg)
Wing Flaps in CRUISE position
73
Precautionary Landing
(with power and Wing Flaps in landing position)
55
Emergency landing with engine off

(Wing Flaps in T/O position)
60
Emergency landing with engine off

(Wing Flaps in LDG position)
55
Emergency landing with engine off (Wing Flaps CRUISE)
64
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 3
DOT Approved
3.3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES - CHECKLISTS
3.3.1 Engine Failures

(a) Engine Failure during Take-off Run
(1) Throttle........................................................ IDLE
(2) Brakes .........................................................as required
(3) Flaps ...........................................................CRUISE
(4) Mixture ........................................................IDLE CUT-OFF
(5) Ignition Switch .............................................OFF
(6) GEN/BAT Master Switch .............................OFF
(b) Engine Failure after Take-Off
INSUFFICIENT ENGINE POWER
(1) Airspeed ..................................................... 60 KIAS
(2) Throttle ........................................................FULL
(3) Mixture ........................................................FULL RICH
(4) Alternate Air ................................................OPEN
(5) Fuel Shut-off Valve ......................................OPEN
(6) Ignition Switch .............................................BOTH
(7) Fuel Pump ..................................................ON
WARNING
IF ADEQUATE ENGINE PERFORMANCE CANNOT BE
RESTORED IMMEDIATELY, PREPARE FOR AN
EMERGENCY LANDING. IF POSSIBLE, LAND STRAIGHT
AHEAD, AVOIDING OBSTACLES.
Page 3 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
SHORTLY BEFORE LANDING

(8) Mixture ....................................................... IDLE CUTOFF
(9) Fuel Shut-off Valve ..................................... CLOSED
(10)Ignition Switch ............................................ OFF
(11)Flaps .......................................................... as required
(12)GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ OFF
ENGINE INOPERATIVE
Perform emergency landing according to paragraph 3.3.3.
(c) Engine Failure during Flight
ENGINE RUNNING ROUGHLY
(1) Mixture ....................................................... FULL RICH
(2) Alternate Air ............................................... OPEN
(3) Fuel Shut-off .............................................. OPEN
(4) Fuel Pump .................................................. ON
(5) Ignition Switch ............................................ cycle L - BOTH - R - BOTH
(6) Throttle ....................................................... at present position
(7) No Improvement ........................................ reduce throttle to minimum
required power, land as soon
as possible.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 5
DOT Approved
LOSS OF OIL PRESSURE
(1) Oil Temperature ......................................... check
(2) If Oil Pressure drops below .........................land at the nearest suitable

Green Arc above 2100RPM. .......................airport.
(3) If Oil Pressure drops below .........................reduce throttle to minimum
Green Arc and oil temperature ....................required power and land as
is rising ........................................................soon as possible. Be prepared
....................................................................for engine failure and
....................................................................an emergency landing.
LOSS OF FUEL PRESSURE
(1) Fuel Pump ................................................. ON, and land at the nearest
suitable airport.
(2) If fuel pressure is not restored. ...................Land at nearest suitable airport.
Be prepared for engine failure
and an emergency landing.
Page 3 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
CAUTION
DO NOT ENGAGE STARTER IF PROPELLER
WINDMILLING. ENGINE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
IS
The propeller will continue to windmill as long as the airspeed is at least 60 KIAS.
RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH PROPELLER WINDMILLING
(1) Airspeed (VIAS) ......................................... 73 kts
(3) Fuel Shut-off Valve ..................................... OPEN
(4) Ignition Switch ............................................ BOTH
(5) Fuel Pump .................................................. ON
(6) Fuel Prime .................................................. ON
(7) Throttle ....................................................... 3/4 in (2cm) forward
AFTER SUCCESSFUL RE-START:
(8) Oil Pressure ............................................... check
(9) Oil Temperature ......................................... check
(10)Fuel Prime .................................................. OFF
(11)Electrically Powered Equipment ................ ON if required
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 7
DOT Approved
RESTARTING THE ENGINE WITH PROPELLER AT FULL STOP

(1) Airspeed ..................................................... 73 kts.
(2) Electrically Powered Equipment .................OFF
(3) GEN/BAT Master Switch .............................ON
(5) Fuel shut off valve .......................................OPEN
(6) Fuel Pump ..................................................ON
(7) Fuel Prime ..................................................ON
(8) Throttle ........................................................3/4 in (2 cm) forward
(9) Ignition Switch .............................................START
(10)Ignition Switch with Push-to-Start (Optional) START (TURN then PUSH)
NOTE
The engine may also be re-started by increasing the
airspeed by pushing the airplane into a descent. A loss of
1000 ft/300 m altitude must be taken into account.
AN AIRSPEED OF 137 KIAS IS REQUIRED TO RESTART
THE ENGINE.
AFTER SUCCESSFUL RE-START:
(11)Oil Pressure ................................................check
(12)Oil Temperature ..........................................check
(13)Fuel Prime ..................................................OFF
(14)Electrically Powered Equipment .................ON if required
Page 3 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.3.2 Gliding
(a) Wing Flaps .........................................................CRUISE
(b) Airspeed at 1764 lbs (800 kg) ............................73 KIAS
(c) Glide Ratio 11:1
Example: For every 1000 feet of altitude the aircraft can move forward 11,000
feet or 1.8 NM (3.4 km).
3.3.3 Emergency Landing

(a) Emergency Landing with Engine off
(1) Airspeed (Flaps in T/O position) ................ 60 KIAS
(2) Airspeed (Flaps in LDG position) ............... 55 KIAS
(3) Airspeed (Flaps CRUISE) .......................... 64 KIAS
(5) Mixture ....................................................... IDLE CUTOFF
(6) Ignition Switch ............................................ OFF
(7) Safety Belts ................................................ secured
(8) Radio .......................................................... Transmit, 121.5 Mhz, giving
location and intentions
(9) Flaps .......................................................... as required
(10)GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ OFF
(11)After Touch Down .................................... Apply brakes
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 9
DOT Approved
(b) Precautionary Landing with Engine Power Available
NOTE
A precautionary landing would be required if continuing the
flight would endanger the aircraft or its occupants.
Circumstances, including mechanical defects, low fuel
quantity or deteriorating weather conditions could require a
precautionary landing.
(1) Search for a suitable place to land. Special attention must be given to wind
direction and obstacles in the approach path.
(2) Safety Belts .................................................secured
(3) Initiate Descent
(5) Throttle ........................................................as required
(6) Trim .............................................................as required
(7) Wing Flaps ..................................................as required
(observe permissable speed)
(8) Over fly selected landing area (not below 500 ft / 150 m above ground)
to confirm suitability and that approach route is free of obstacles.
(9) Climb up to pattern altitude.
(10)Low pass over flight at a safe altitude to observe any possible obstacles,
such as cables, fences, ditches.
(11)Climb up to pattern altitude.
(12)Radio ..........................................................Transmit, giving location and
intentions.
Page 3 - 10
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
(13)Final Approach:
(A) Mixture ................................................. FULL RICH
(B) Throttle ................................................ as required
(C) Fuel Pump ........................................... ON
(D) Wing Flaps .......................................... LDG
(E) Airspeed .............................................. 55 KIAS
(14)Touch-down is to be made with minimum airspeed, nose wheel should be
kept above ground as long as possible.
(15)After Touch-down:
(A) Brake ................................................... as required
(B) Fuel Shut-off Valve .............................. CLOSED
(C) Mixture ................................................. IDLE CUT-OFF
(D) Ignition Switch ..................................... OFF
(E) GEN/BAT Master Switch ..................... OFF
NOTE
If no suitable level landing area can be found, an up-hill
landing should be performed, if possible.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 11
DOT Approved
3.3.4 Fire
(a) Engine Fire during Engine-Start-Up on the Ground

(2) Cabin Heat ..................................................CLOSED
(3) Mixture ........................................................IDLE CUTOFF
(4) GEN/BAT Master Switch .............................OFF
(6) Evacuate Airplane immediately
(b) Engine Fire during Flight
(3) Airspeed ......................................................73 KIAS
NOTE
Airspeed is for best glide with flaps in CRUISE position. If a
suitable landing area is available and can be safely reached,
airspeed can be increased in an attempt to extinguish the
fire. Do not exceed airspeeds given for structural limitations.
(4) Fuel Pump ..................................................OFF
(5) Perform emergency landing with engine off according to paragraph 3.3.3.
Page 3 - 12
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
(c) Electrical Fire including Smoke during Flight

(1) GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ OFF
(2) Cabin Air .................................................... OPEN
(3) Fire Extinguisher ........................................ use only if smoke development
continues.
CAUTION
IF FIRE EXTINGUISHER IS USED, THE CABIN MUST BE
VENTILATED.
In case the fire is extinguished and electric power is required for continuation of
the flight:
(4) Avionics Master Switch .............................. OFF
(5) Electrically Powered Equipment ................ OFF
NOTE
Restore electrical power systematically allowing time to
monitor the system voltmeter and amp meter between the
reconnection of loads. Watch carefully for smoke.
(6) Circuit Breakers ......................................... Push all circuit breakers
(7) Circuit Breakers ......................................... Push BATTERY
(8) GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ ON BAT 1/2 only
(9) Circuit Breakers ......................................... Push GEN & GEN CONTROL
(10)GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ ON
(11)Circuit Breakers ......................................... Push AVIONICS and
AVIONICS MASTER
(12)Avionics Master Switch .............................. ON
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 13
DOT Approved
(13)Circuit Breakers ..........................................Push to activate systems as

required.
(14)Radio ..........................................................ON
(15)Land as soon as possible.
(d) Electrical Fire including Smoke on the Ground
IF ENGINE IS RUNNING:
(2) Throttle ........................................................IDLE
(3) Mixture ........................................................IDLE CUTOFF
(4) Fuel Shut-off Valve ......................................CLOSED
(6) Canopy .......................................................open
(7) Fire Extinguisher .........................................discharge as required
(e) Cabin Fire during Flight
(2) Cabin Air .....................................................OPEN
(4) Fire Extinguisher .........................................discharge as required
(5) Land as soon as possible
CAUTION
IF THE FIRE EXTINGUISHER IS USED, THE CABIN
MUST BE VENTILATED.
Page 3 - 14
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.3.5 Icing
Unintentional Flight Into Icing Area
(a) Leave icing area (through change of altitude or change of flight direction to
reach area with higher outside air temp).
(b) Continue to move control surfaces to maintain their moveability.
(c) Alternate Air ........................................................ON
(d) Increase RPM to avoid icing of propeller blades (observe maximum RPM).
(e) Cabin Heat .........................................................ON DEFROST
CAUTION
IN CASE OF ICING ON THE LEADING EDGE OF THE
WING, THE STALL SPEED WILL INCREASE.
CAUTION
WING, ERRONEOUS INDICATING OF THE AIRSPEED,
ALTIMETER, RATE OF CLIMB AND STALL WARNING
SHOULD BE EXPECTED.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 3 - 15
DOT Approved
3.3.6 Recovery from Unintentional Spin
(a) Throttle ............................................................... IDLE
(b) Rudder ............................................................... fully applied opposite

direction of spin
to
(c) Control Stick ....................................................... ease forward

(d) Rudder ............................................................... neutral, after
stopped
rotation
has
(e) Wing Flaps ......................................................... CRUISE

(f) Elevator .............................................................. pull cautiously. Bring airplane
from descent into level flight
position. Do not exceed
maximum permissible speed
(VNE).
3.3.7 Landing with Defective Tire on Main Landing Gear
(a) Final approach with wing flaps in landing position.
(b) Land airplane on the side of runway opposite to the side with the defective tire
to compensate for change in direction which is to be expected during final
rolling.
(c) Land with wing slightly tipped in the direction of the non-defective tire. To
increase the maneuverability during rolling, the nose-wheel should be brought
to the ground as soon as possible after touch-down.
(d) To ease the load on the defective tire, the aileron should be fully applied in the
direction of the non-defective tire.
Page 3 - 16
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.3.8 Electrical Power Failure

(a) Total Electrical Power Failure
(1) Battery Circuit Breaker ............................... If tripped, reset
(2) GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ check ON
(3) Master Switch ............................................ OFF if power not restored
(4) If Unsuccessful ........................................... Land at nearest suitable airport
(b) Generator Failure
GEN. ANNUNCIATOR ILLUMINATED
(1) GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................ Cycle Generator Master Switch
OFF - ON
(2) Generator Circuit Breaker .......................... If tripped, reset
(3) Generator CONTROL Circuit Breaker ....... If tripped, reset
(4) If Generator can not be brought on-line ..... Switch OFF all non-flight
essential electrical consumers.
Monitor Ammeter and
Voltmeter. Land at nearest
suitable airport.
NOTE
There is 30 minutes of battery power at a discharge load of
20 amperes when the battery is fully charged and properly
maintained.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 17
DOT Approved
(c) Low Voltage Indication (needle in yellow Arc)
LOW VOLTAGE INDICATION (NEEDLE IN YELLOW ARC) WHILE AIRPLANE

IS ON THE GROUND
(1) Engine RPM ............................................... Increase RPM until needle is in
the Green Arc. This should
occur before exceeding 1100
RPM.
(2) Non-flight essential electrical consumers ....Switch OFF consumers until
needle is in the Green Arc.
(3) If needle remains in the yellow arc ..............Discontinue any planned flight
and the ammeter is indicating to the
activity
left of center (discharge).
LOW VOLTAGE INDICATION (NEEDLE IN YELLOW ARC) DURING FLIGHT
(1) All non-flight essential electrical.................. Switch OFF
consumers
(2) If needle is remaining in the yellow arc.......Generator Failure
Refer to paragraph 3.3.8.C.
left of center (Discharge).
LOW VOLTAGE INDICATION (NEEDLE IN YELLOW ARC) DURING LANDING
(1) After landing ............................................... proceed in accordance with
paragraph 3.3.8.C.
WARNING
IF AT ANY TIME THE VOLTMETER NEEDLE INDICATES
IN THE RED ARC, THE PILOT SHOULD LAND AT THE
NEAREST SUITABLE AIRPORT AND SERVICE THE
AIRCRAFT ACCORDINGLY BEFORE CONTINUING THE
FLIGHT.
Page 3 - 18
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.3.9 Flap System Failure

Flap Position Indicator Failure
(a) Visual check of the flap position
(b) Select airspeed within the range of the white arc marked on the airspeed
indicator
(c) Check all positions of the flap toggle switch (flap stops are fail-safe)
(d) Modify approach and landing as follows:
(1) only CRUISE available: ...........................- raise approach speed by 10 kts
- throttle as required
- flat approach angle
(2) only T/O available: ..................................- normal approach speed
- throttle as required
- flat approach angle
(3) only LDG available: .................................- normal landing
3.3.10 Starter Relay Failure

Starter does not disengage after starting the engine (start light remains illuminated).
(a) Throttle ...........................................................IDLE
(b) Mixture ...........................................................IDLE CUTOFF
(c) Ignition Switch ...............................................OFF
discontinue any planned flight.
Maintenance action is required.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 19
DOT Approved
3.3.11 Avionics System Failure
TOTAL AVIONICS FAILURE:
(a) Check Avionics Master Circuit.............................If popped, press and monitor

Breaker
status. If it pops again, land at
the nearest suitable airport.
(b) Check Avionics Master Switch ........................... Toggle avionics master switch,
if avionics system remains offline, pull avionics master
control circuit breaker. Land at
the nearest suitable airport if
operation is not restored.
RADIO SYSTEM OPERATIVE, NO RECEPTION:
(a) Microphone Key ................................................. check for stuck Microphone
Key on transceiver display.
(b) Headphones ....................................................... check, deactivate SQUELCH
for a few moments,
if SQUELCH not heard, check
headset connection.
RADIO SYSTEM OPERATIVE, TRANSMITTING NOT POSSIBLE:
(a) Selected Frequency ........................................... check if correct
(b) Microphone ........................................................ Install handheld mike as
follows:
- Unplug and remove headset.
- Plug handheld mike in.
- Turn up speaker volume on
audio panel.
Check, if available use a
different headset.
Problem cannot be resolved: .................... - switch transponder (if available) to
"COMM FAILURE"
- code if required by the situation and
permitted by applicable national
regulations.
Page 3 - 20
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.3.12 Trim System Failure

STUCK TRIM:
(a) Circuit breaker ....................................................check, press if breaker is
tripped
(b) Rocker switch .....................................................depress in both directions,
wait 5 minutes, try again
NOTE
Full range of travel is available for elevator, but expect
higher forces on control stick.
(c) Land at the nearest suitable airport
RUNAWAY OF TRIM:
(a) Control Stick .......................................................Grip stick and maintain control
of the airplane.
(b) Trim motor circuit breaker ..................................Pull circuit breaker.
(c) Rocker Switch ....................................................Check if depressed.
If the reason for the runaway condition is obvious and has been resolved, push in
(engage) the circuit breaker.
NOTE
Full travel of the elevator trim system will take approximately
10 seconds.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 3 - 21
DOT Approved
3.3.13 Instrument Panel Lighting Failure
(a) Rocker Switch, map light .................................... ON
(b) Rocker Switch, I-panel lighting ........................... Cycle Rocker Switch OFF-ON
(c) Dimming Control ................................................ Turn fully clockwise
(d) Internal Lighting Circuit Breaker ......................... If tripped, reset
(e) If NOT Successful .............................................. Use flashlight
Expect an electrical power failure. Refer to paragraph 3.3.8.
Page 3 - 22
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures
CHAPTER 4
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
4.1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 3
4.2
AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL flight OPERATION .................................. 3
4.3
STRUCTURAL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR ...................................... 4
4.4
NORMAL OPERATION CHECKLIST .................................................... 5

4.4.1
Preflight Inspection ............................................................... 5

(a) In-Cabin Check.............................................................. 5
(b) Walk Around Check and Visual Inspection ................... 7
4.4.2
Before Starting Engine .........................................................11
4.4.3
Starting Engine ................................................................... 12

(a) Starting Engine Cold ................................................... 12
(b) Starting Engine Warm ................................................ 15
4.4.4
Before Taxiing ..................................................................... 17
4.4.5
Taxiing ................................................................................. 18
4.4.6
Before Take-off (Engine Run-up) ....................................... 19
4.4.7
Take-off ............................................................................... 21
4.4.8
Climb ................................................................................... 22
4.4.9
Cruise ................................................................................. 22
4.4.10
Descent ............................................................................... 23
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 1
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
PAGE
4.4.11
Landing Approach ................................................................24
4.4.12
Balked Landing ....................................................................25
4.4.13
After Landing .......................................................................25
4.4.14
Engine Shut-down ...............................................................25
4.4.15
Flight in Rain ........................................................................26
4.4.16
Spinning ...............................................................................27
(a) Spin Entry.....................................................................27
(b) Recovery from Spinning ...............................................28
4.4.17
Page 4 - 2
DOT Approved
Idle Power Operations ........................................................29
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.1
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 4 contains checklists and describes extended procedures for the normal
operation of the airplane.
4.2
AIRSPEEDS FOR NORMAL FLIGHT OPERATION

Unless stated otherwise, the following table contains the applicable airspeeds for
maximum take-off and landing weight. The airspeeds may also be used for lower
flight weights.
TAKE-OFF
KIAS
Climb Speed during normal take-off for 50 ft (15 m) obstacle
58
Best Rate-of-Climb speed at sea level VY. Wing Flaps CRUISE
75
Best Angle-of-Climb speed at sea level VX. Wing Flaps CRUISE
60
Best Rate-of-Climb speed at sea level VY. Wing Flaps T/O
68
Best Angle-of-Climb speed at sea level VX. Wing Flaps T/O
57
LANDING
KIAS
Approach speed for normal landing. Wing Flaps LDG
55
Balked landing climb speed. Wing Flaps LDG
52
Maximum demonstrated crosswind speed during take-off and landing
20
CRUISE
KIAS
Maximum permissible speed in rough air VNO
118
Maximum permissible speed with full control surface deflections VA
106
Maximum permissible speed with Wing Flaps in T/O Position (VFE T/O)
100
Maximum permissible speed with Wing Flaps in LDG Position (VFE LDG)
78
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 3
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.3
STRUCTURAL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

A structural temperature indicator, installed on the spar bridge, indicates when the
structural temperature limitation is exceeded (refer to Section 2.17). The indicator
need only be checked if the OAT exceeds 38 C (100 F).
The indicator is accessed by lifting the flap between the two seat-back cushions.
The indicator is visible through the cut out in the seat shell backs (see Figure 4.2).
At temperatures below the 55 C (131 F) limit, the indicator appears all red with a
faint indication of 55 ( C). At temperatures exceeding the 55 C (131 F) limit, the
indicator displays a clearly contrasting red 55 ( C) on a black background
(see Figure 4.1).
NOTE
At temperatures approaching the limit, the background will
progressively darken prior to turning black; this indicates
acceptable temperatures.
NOTE
Aircraft with other than white undersides have an additional
structural temperature indicator installed adjacent to the fuel
drains.
Red 55 on black background

indicates that structural temperature
limit is exceeded. Flight is prohibited.
All red indicates that structural

temperature is below limit.
Flight is permitted.
Figure 4.1
Location of indicator
On centerline of aircraft
NOTE: Refer to Page 2-30

for the actual Location of
the indicator.
Figure 4.2
Page 4 - 4
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.4
NORMAL OPERATION CHECKLIST
4.4.1 Preflight Inspection

(a) In-Cabin Check
(1) Structural Temperature Indicator .............check that Structural Temperature
(if OAT exceeds 38 C (100 F))
does not exceed 55 C (131 F)
(2) Airplane Documents ................................check
(3) Flight Control Lock ..................................removed
(4) Flight Controls .........................................check for proper direction of
movement
(5) Ignition Key .............................................pulled out
(6) Cabin Heat ..............................................free
(7) Parking Brake .........................................free
(8) Throttle ....................................................free, IDLE
(9) Mixture ....................................................free, IDLE CUTOFF
(10)GEN/BAT Master Switch .........................ON
(11)Warning Lights (Gen. and Canopy) .........illuminated
(12)Fuel Quantity ...........................................sufficient
(13)Engine Gauges, Ammeter and.................check
Voltmeter
(14)Circuit Breakers ......................................pressed in
(15)Map Light ................................................operational
(16)Instrument Lights ....................................operational and dimmable
(17)Trim .........................................................NEUTRAL
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 5
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
(18)Wing Flaps (Indicator- ............................. check, extend and retract fully

andflap Actuation)
(19)Trim and Flap Indicator Lights ................ operational and dimmable
(20)Exterior Lights ......................................... operational as required
(21)GEN/BAT Master Switch ......................... OFF
(22)Foreign Object Inspection ....................... done
(23)Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT):
ARTEX ELT-200.............................. ARM
EBC Model 502 -............................. ARM
EBC Model 102A - .......................... OFF
ARTEX ME 406 .............................. ARM
(24)Fire Extinguisher ..................................... check
(25)Rescue Hammer ..................................... check
(26)Baggage ................................................. stowed, baggage net attached
(27)Canopy ................................................... clean, undamaged
Page 4 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

(b) Walk Around Check and Visual Inspection
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 7
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
CAUTION
VISUALLY
INSPECT
FOR
THE
FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS: DEFECTS, CONTAMINATION, CRACKS,
DELAMINATIONS, EXCESSIVE PLAY, INSECURE OR
IMPROPER MOUNTING AND GENERAL CONDITION.
ADDITIONALLY, CHECK THE CONTROL SURFACES
FOR FREEDOM OF MOVEMENT.
CAUTION
SET THE PARKING BRAKE PRIOR TO REMOVING THE
WHEEL CHOCKS.
(1) Left Main Landing Gear
(A) Landing Gear Strut ...................................visual inspection
(B) Wheel Fairing ...........................................visual inspection
(C) Tire Pressure (33 psi / 2.3 bar) .................check
(D) Tire, Wheel, Brake ....................................visual inspection
(E) Wheel Chocks ..........................................remove
(2) Left Wing
(A) Entire Wing ...............................................visual inspection
(B) Stall Warning ............................................check (suck on opening)
(C) Pitot-Static Probe ......................................clean, holes open
(D) Tie down ...................................................remove
(E) Taxi and Landing Lights ............................visual inspection
(F) Wing Tip, Position Lights and Strobe .......visual inspection
Page 4 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures
(G) Aileron Balancing Weight .........................visual inspection

(H) Aileron including Inspection Panel ...........visual inspection
(I) Wing Flap including Inspection Panel ......visual inspection
(3) Fuselage
(A) Skin ..........................................................visual inspection
(B) Fuel Tank Vent ..........................................check
(C) Fuel Drains ...............................................drain water
(D) Structural Temperature Indicator .............. check that the structural
(for aircraft with other than white
temperature does
Undersides)
not exceed 55 C (131 F)
(E) Maintenance Fuel Drains .........................no leaks
(F) Fuel Quantity ............................................visual inspection
(use fuel dipstick)
(G) Antennas ..................................................visual inspection
(4) Empennage
(A) Stabilizers and Control Surfaces ..............visual inspection
(B) Tie down ...................................................remove
(C) Fixed Tab on Rudder ................................visual inspection
(5) Right Wing
(A) Entire Wing ...............................................visual inspection
(B) Wing Flap including Inspection Panel ......visual inspection
(C) Aileron including Inspection Panel ...........visual inspection
(D) Aileron Balancing Weight .........................visual inspection
(E) Wing Tip, Position Lights and Strobe ........visual inspection
(F) Tie down ...................................................remove
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 4 - 9
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
(6) Right Main Landing Gear

(A) Landing Gear Strut ...................................visual inspection
(B) Wheel Fairing ...........................................visual inspection
(C) Tire Pressure (33 psi / 2.3 bar) .................check
(D) Tire, Wheel, Brake ....................................visual inspection
(E) Wheel Chocks ..........................................remove
(7) Nose
(A) Oil .............................................................check level by using dipstick.
Max level is 6 US quarts
Min level is 4 US quarts
(B) Cowling .....................................................visual inspection
(C) Air Intakes ................................................clear
(D) Propeller ...................................................visual inspection, Ground
Clearance; minimum:
approx. 25 cm (10 in.)
(E) Propeller Blades .......................................check for damage
(F) Spinner .....................................................visual inspection
(G) Nose Gear ................................................visual inspection, towbar
removed
(H) Wheel Fairing ...........................................visual inspection
(I) Tire Pressure (26 psi / 1.8 bar) .................check
(J) Tire and Wheel .........................................visual inspection
(K) Wheel Chocks ..........................................remove
Page 4 - 10
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.2 Before Starting Engine
CAUTION
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE, THE CANOPY MUST
BE CLOSED AND LATCHED. THE RED HANDLES MUST
BE MOVED FULLY FORWARD.
AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE, THE CANOPY MUST
STAY IN THE CLOSED AND LATCHED POSITION UNTIL
THE ENGINE IS SHUT DOWN.
DURING ENGINE OPERATION IT IS PROHIBITED TO
ENTER OR EXIT THE AIRPLANE.
(a) Preflight Inspection ........................................... performed
(b) Pedals .............................................................. adjust, lock pull T-grip straight
back
(c) Passenger Briefing ........................................... performed
(d) Safety Belts ...................................................... fastened
(e) Parking Brake ................................................... set
(f) Flight Controls .................................................. free
(g) Fuel Shut-off Valve ........................................... OPEN
(h) Mixture .............................................................. FULL RICH
(i) Throttle ............................................................. IDLE
(j) Friction Device of Throttle Quadrant ................ adjust
(k) Avionics Master Switch .................................... OFF
(l) GEN/BAT Master Switch .................................. ON
(m) Generator Warning Light .................................. illuminated
(n) Exterior Lights .................................................. as required
(o) Instrument Panel Lighting ................................. as required
(p) Canopy ............................................................. Close and Secure
(q) Canopy Unlock Warning Light .......................... OFF
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 11
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.4.3 Starting Engine

(a) Starting Engine Cold
NOTE
It is recommended that the engine be preheated if it has
been cold soaked for 2 hours or more at temperatures of
-4 C (25 F) or less.
(1) Throttle ....................................................... IDLE
(3) Toe Brakes ................................................. hold
(4) Propeller Area ............................................ clear
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT THE PROPELLER AREA IS CLEAR
CAUTION
DO NOT ENGAGE STARTER IF THE PROPELLER IS
MOVING. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE CAN RESULT.
NOTE
Steps (5), (6), (7), (8), (9), and (10) are to be performed
without delay between the steps.
NOTE
Colder ambient temperatures require longer priming.
(5) Fuel Pump ................................................. ON
(6) Fuel Prime ................................................. ON
Page 4 - 12
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures
(7) Throttle ....................................................... FULL for prime

prime for 5 -10 seconds
minimum before starting)
(8) Throttle ....................................................... Full IDLE to inch OPEN
(adjust as required)
(9) Ignition Switch ............................................ START, hold until engine starts
or for 10 seconds maximum (if
engine does not start, release
ignition key, push throttle to full
power for 3 seconds minimum
for more priming, then repeat
from Step (8)
NOTE
If the optional Push-to-Start ignition switch is installed, then
additional PUSH action is required after the ignition switch
is turned to the START position when implementing start.
(10)Starter Warning Light ................................. illuminated while ignition is in
the START position
NOTE
Activate the starter for a maximum of 30 seconds only,
followed by a cooling period of 3-5 minutes.
(11)Throttle ....................................................... 1000 25 RPM
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE ABOVE 1000 RPM UNTIL AN
OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATION IS REGISTERED.
(12)Fuel Prime .................................................. OFF
(13)Engine Instruments .................................... check
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 13
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
NOTE
Excessive priming can result in a flooded engine. To clear a
flooded engine, turn off the fuel pump and fuel prime, open
the throttle 1/2 to 1 inch and engage the starter. The engine
should start for a short period and then stop. Excess fuel has
now been cleared and engine start from item (1) can be
performed.
CAUTION
IF OIL PRESSURE IS BELOW 10 PSI, SHUT DOWN THE
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY (MAXIMUM 30 SECONDS
DELAY).
NOTE
Oil Pressure may advance above the green arc until Oil
Temperature reaches normal operating temperatures.
Regulate warm up RPM to maintain pressure below 100 psi
limit. At ambient temperatures below 32 F (0 C) DO NOT
apply full power if oil pressure is above 70 psi.
(14)Starter Warning Light ................................. check OFF
Page 4 - 14
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

(b) Starting Engine Warm
(1) Throttle ....................................................... IDLE
(3) Toe Brakes ................................................. hold
(4) Propeller Area ............................................ clear
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT THE PROPELLER AREA IS CLEAR.
CAUTION
DO NOT ENGAGE THE STARTER IF THE PROPELLER IS
MOVING. SERIOUS DAMAGE CAN RESULT.
NOTE
Steps (5), (6), (7), (8), (9), and (10) are to be performed
without delay between the steps.
(5) Fuel Pump .................................................. ON
(6) Fuel Prime .................................................. ON
(7) Throttle ....................................................... FULL for prime
(prime for 1 to 3 seconds before
starting)
(8) Throttle .......................................................
to
1
inch
(approximately)
OPEN
(9) Ignition Switch ............................................ START, hold until the engine

starts or for 10 seconds
maximum (repeat from Step (7)
if the engine does not start)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 15
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
NOTE
If the optional Push-to-Start ignition switch is installed, then
additional PUSH action is required after the ignition switch
is turned to the START position when implementing start.
(10)Starter Warning Light ................................. illuminated while ignition is in
the START position
NOTE
(11)Throttle ....................................................... 1000 25 RPM .
(12)Fuel Prime ................................................. OFF
(13)Engine Instruments .................................... check
NOTE
Excessive priming can result in a flooded engine. To clear a
flooded engine, turn off the fuel pump and fuel prime, open
the throttle 1/2 to 1 inch and engage the starter. The engine
should start for a short period and then stop. Excess fuel has
now been cleared and engine start from item (1) can be
performed.
CAUTION
IF OIL PRESSURE IS BELOW 10 PSI, SHUT DOWN THE
ENGINE IMMEDIATELY (MAXIMUM 30 SECONDS
DELAY).
Page 4 - 16
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures
NOTE
Oil Pressure may advance above the green arc until Oil
Temperature reaches normal operating temperatures.
Regulate warm up RPM to maintain pressure below 100 psi
limit. At ambient temperatures below 32 F (0 C) DO NOT
apply full power if oil pressure is above 70 psi.
(14)Starter Warning Light ................................. check OFF
4.4.4 Before Taxiing

(a) Avionics Master Switch .................................... ON
(b) Flight Instruments and Avionics ....................... set
(c) Engine Gauges ................................................. check
(d) Voltmeter .......................................................... check, ensure needle is in the
green arc. Increase RPM to
achieve or turn OFF non-flight
essential electrical consumers
(e) Warning Lights, Gen, Canopy, Start,................. push to test
EPU (if installed)
(f) Fuel Prime check .............................................. OFF
(g) Fuel Pump ........................................................ check ON
(h) Parking Brake ................................................... release
CAUTION
WARM-UP ENGINE TO A MINIMUM OIL TEMPERATURE
OF 75 F AT 1000 TO 1200 RPM (ALSO POSSIBLE
DURING TAXI). DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE ABOVE 1000
RPM UNTIL AN OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATION IS
REGISTERED.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 17
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.4.5 Taxiing
(a) Brake ................................................................ check
(b) Mixture ............................................................. FULL RICH
(c) Throttle ............................................................. As required
(d) Direction Control .............................................. check
(e) Flight Instruments and Avionics ....................... check
(f) Compass .......................................................... check
CAUTION
AT HIGH ENGINE RPM THE PROPELLER CAN BE
DAMAGED BY LOOSE SAND, GRAVEL OR WATER.
Page 4 - 18
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.6 Before Take-off (Engine Run-up)
NOTE
For OATs less than -5 F (-20 C) turn cabin heat on for at
least 10 minutes prior to take-off.
(a) Brakes .............................................................. apply
(b) Safety Belts ...................................................... fastened
(c) Canopy ............................................................. closed and locked
(d) Canopy Unlock Warning Light .......................... OFF
(e) Fuel Pressure ................................................... check
(f) Fuel Shut-off Valve ........................................... check OPEN
(g) Fuel Quantity Indicator ..................................... check
(h) Fuel Prime check .............................................. OFF
(i) Fuel Pump check .............................................. ON
(j) Trim .................................................................. NEUTRAL
(k) Flight Controls .................................................. free
(l) Oil Temp. .......................................................... 75 minimum
(m) Mixture .............................................................. FULL RICH
(n) Throttle ............................................................. 1700 RPM
(o) Magneto Check ................................................ Cycle L - BOTH - R BOTH
(RPM drop: 25-150 RPM) (Max.
RPM difference (L/R): 50 RPM)
(p) Mixture .............................................................. check
(q) Alt. Load ........................................................... check
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 19
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
(r) Oil Pressure ..................................................... 30-60 psi

(s) Vacuum Gauge (if installed) ............................. within green range
(t) Throttle ............................................................. IDLE (975 RPM Minimum, for
aircraft with altitude
compensating fuel system)
(u) Mixture ............................................................. Move slowly toward lean cut off
(RPM increase) (50 RPM
Minimum, for aircraft with
altitude compensating fuel
system)
(v) Mixture ............................................................. FULL RICH
(w) Circuit Breakers ................................................ check pressed IN
(x) Wing Flaps ....................................................... T/O
(y) Parking Brake ................................................... release
CAUTION
SHUT THE VENT WINDOW SCOOP PRIOR TO TAKEOFF. IF THE VENT WINDOW SCOOP IS LEFT OPEN
DURING FLIGHT IT CAN BE BLOWN OFF AND CAUSE
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT.
Page 4 - 20
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.7 Take-off
(a) Fuel Prime ........................................................ check OFF
(b) Fuel Pump ........................................................ check ON
(c) Mixture .............................................................. check FULL RICH

(d) GEN/BAT Master Switch .................................. check ON
(e) Ignition Switch .................................................. check BOTH
(f) Wing Flaps ....................................................... check T/O
(g) Trim .................................................................. NEUTRAL
(h) Throttle .............................................................. FULL
Check RPM
min 2000 RPM
(i) Elevator - at beginning of rolling ....................... NEUTRAL
(j) Directional Control ............................................ maintain with rudder
NOTE
In crosswind conditions, directional control can be enhanced
by using the single wheel brakes. Note that using the brakes
for directional control increases the take-off roll distance.
(k) Rotate ............................................................... 44 KIAS
(l) Climb Speed to clear 50 ft. obstacle ................. 58 KIAS
CAUTION
FOR THE SHORTEST POSSIBLE TAKE-OFF DISTANCE
TO CLEAR A 15 M (50 FT) OBSTACLE:
Lift-off Speed.............................................. 52 KIAS
Climb Speed to clear 50 ft. obstacle......... 58 KIAS
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 21
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.4.8 Climb
(a) Mixture .............................................................. FULL RICH
NOTE
For aircraft without the altitude compensating fuel pump, at
full throttle settings with power less than 75%, it is necessary
to lean the engine with the mixture control. It should be
noted that with the engine set to full throttle, it can produce
less than 75% power, depending on pressure altitude.
Refer to the Section 5.3.2., Performance to determine the
engine performance as a function of altitude and
temperature. Expect engines without altitude compensating
fuel pump to require leaning at full throttle above 5000 ft
pressure altitude.
(b) Throttle ............................................................. FULL
(c) Engine Gauges ................................................ within green range
(d) Wing Flaps (400 ft AGL) ................................... CRUISE
(e) Airspeed ........................................................... 75 KIAS
(f) Trim .................................................................. adjust
4.4.9 Cruise
(a) Fuel Pump ........................................................ OFF
(b) Throttle ............................................................. as required
(c) Mixture ............................................................. lean to 25 F rich of peak EGT.
DO NOT lean by EGT above
75% power
(d) Wing Flaps ....................................................... CRUISE
(e) Trim .................................................................. as required
(f) Engine Gauges ................................................ check
Page 4 - 22
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.10 Descent
(a) Flight Instruments and Avionics ....................... adjust
(b) Fuel Pump ........................................................ ON
(c) Mixture .............................................................. FULL RICH
(d) Throttle ............................................................. as required
CAUTION
ADJUST DESCENT PROFILE (ANGLE, AIRSPEED, AND
POWER) AS REQUIRED TO AVOID ENGINE SHOCK
COOLING.
NOTE
To achieve a fast descent:
Throttle ................................... IDLE
Wing Flaps ............................. CRUISE
Airspeed .................................118 KIAS
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 23
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.4.11 Landing Approach

(a) Seat Belts ......................................................... fastened
(b) Lights ................................................................ as required
(c) GEN/BAT Master Switch .................................. check ON
(d) Ignition Switch .................................................. check BOTH
(e) Fuel Pump ........................................................ check ON
(f) Mixture ............................................................. FULL RICH
(g) Throttle ............................................................. as required
(h) Airspeed ........................................................... max. 78 KIAS
(i) Wing Flaps ....................................................... T/O
(j) Trim .................................................................. as required
(k) Wing Flaps ....................................................... LDG
(l) Approach Speed .............................................. 55 KIAS
CAUTION
FOR STRONG HEADWIND, CROSSWIND, DANGER OF
WINDSHEAR OR TURBULENCE, A HIGHER APPROACH
SPEED SHOULD BE SELECTED.
Page 4 - 24
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.12 Balked Landing
(a) Throttle ............................................................. FULL
(b) Mixture .............................................................. FULL RICH
(c) Wing Flaps ....................................................... T/O
(d) Airspeed ........................................................... 58 KIAS
4.4.13 After Landing
(a) Throttle ............................................................. as required
(c) Wing Flaps ....................................................... CRUISE
(d) Avionics ............................................................ as required
(e) Exterior Lights .................................................. as required
4.4.14 Engine Shut-down
(a) Parking Brake ................................................... set
(b) Throttle ............................................................. IDLE

(c) Fuel Pump ........................................................ OFF
(d) Mixture .............................................................. IDLE CUT-OFF
(e) Ignition Switch .................................................. OFF
(f) ELT ................................................................... Check (by listening to 121.5
MHZ for signal)
(g) Avionics Master Switch .................................... OFF
(h) Electric Consumers .......................................... OFF
(i) GEN/BAT Master Switch .................................. OFF
(j) Tie Downs and Wheel Chocks ......................... as required
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 4 - 25
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
4.4.15 Flight in Rain
NOTE
Flight performance might be reduced, especially for the T/O
distance and the maximum horizontal air speed. The
influence on flight characteristics of the airplane is negligible.
Flights through heavy rain should be avoided due to the
reduced visibility.
Page 4 - 26
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.16 Spinning
(a) Spin Entry
(1) Loose Items ............................................... stowed
(2) Seat Belts ................................................... fastened
(3) Altitude and Airspace ................................. check
(4) Fuel Pump .................................................. ON
(5) Wing Flaps ................................................. CRUISE
(7) Throttle ....................................................... IDLE
(8) Entry Speed ............................................... trim to 58 KIAS

(9) Reduce speed with elevator ....................... speed reduction rate 2-3 kts per
second
(10)When stall warning sounds ........................ apply simultaneously, full aft
stick and full rudder
CAUTION
INTENTIONAL SPINNING IS ONLY PERMITTED WITH
THE FLAPS IN CRUISE POSITION.
CAUTION
DEPENDING ON CG AND SPIN ENTRY TECHNIQUE,
ATTEMPTS TO ENTER SPINS MAY DEVELOP INTO
SPIRAL DIVES. MONITOR THE AIRSPEED DURING THE
FIRST TURN AND RECOVER IMMEDIATELY IF IT
INCREASES TO 65 KIAS.
NOTE
Spins with aft CG may oscillate in yaw rate and pitch
attitude. This has no effect on recovery procedure or
recovery time.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 27
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
(b) Recovery from Spinning

(1) Throttle ....................................................... IDLE
(2) Rudder ....................................................... fully applied in opposite to
direction of spin
(3) Control Stick ............................................... ease
stick
forward
spinning stops
until
(4) Rudder ....................................................... neutral,

immediately
rotation has stopped
after
(5) Wing Flaps ................................................. check CRUISE

(6) Control Stick ............................................... ease stick backward cautiously
Bring airplane from descent into
level flight position. Do not
exceed maximum permissible
speed (VNE).
Page 4 - 28
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Normal Operating
Procedures

4.4.17 Idle Power Operations
NOTE
Turn the fuel pump on for all low throttle operations,
including taxiing and all flight operations when engine speed
could fall below 1400 RPM (eg. stalls, descents, spins,
landings, etc.).
(a) Fuel Pump ........................................................ ON
(c) Throttle ............................................................. IDLE
NOTE
For aircraft with altitude compensating fuel system the
minimum recommended flight idle is 1400 RPM, during idle
power flight conditions and maneuvres.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 4 - 29
DOT Approved
Normal Operating
Procedures
Page 4 - 30
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Performance
CHAPTER 5
PERFORMANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
5.1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................... 3
5.2
USE OF THE PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS ................ 3
5.3
PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS ....................................... 4
5.4
5.3.1
Airspeed System Calibration ................................................. 4
5.3.2
Cruising Performance ........................................................... 5
5.3.3
Equivalent Altitude Chart........................................................ 6
5.3.4
Stall Speeds .......................................................................... 7
5.3.5
Wind Components ................................................................. 8
5.3.6
Take-off Distance .................................................................. 9
5.3.7
Climb Performance /Cruising Altitudes ............................... 11
5.3.8
Climb Performance / Take off .............................................. 12
5.3.9
Cruising Speed (True Airspeed) .......................................... 13
5.3.10
Maximum Flight Duration .................................................... 14
5.3.11
Climb Performance / Balked Landing .................................. 16
5.3.12
Landing Distance ................................................................ 17
Noise Data ........................................................................................... 18
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 5 - 1
DOT Approved
Performance
Page 5 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
5.1
Performance
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the performance data required by the basis of certification. This
data which has been approved by Transport Canada is marked DOT Approved in the
footer of the page. Where additional performance data has been provided, beyond the
basis for certification, it has not been reviewed or approved by Transport Canada.
The performance data contained in the following pages has been prepared to illustrate
the performance you may expect from your airplane and to assist you in precise flight
planning. The data presented has been derived from test-flights using an airplane and
engine in good operating condition. The data is corrected to standard atmospheric
conditions 59 F (15 C) and 29.92 in. Hg (1013.25 mbar) at sea level) except where
noted.
The performance data do not take into account the expertise of the pilot or the
maintenance condition of the airplane. The performance described can be achieved if
the indicated procedures are followed and the airplane is maintained in good condition.
5.2
USE OF THE PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS

The performance data is shown in the form of tables and diagrams to illustrate the
influence of different variables. The tables contain sufficiently detailed information to plan
flights with precision and safety. Where the performance differs due to the type of
propeller that is installed, the table or graph is printed for each propeller and clearly
identified.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 5 - 3
DOT Approved
Performance
5.3
PERFORMANCE TABLES AND DIAGRAMS
5.3.1 Airspeed System Calibration

Assumes zero indicator error.
Table 1 - Airspeed System Calibration
Flaps Cruise
KIAS
44
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
KCAS
54
VS1
58
62
66
70
75
79
83
92
101
110
120
129
138
147
156
105
---
---
---
---
---
---
164
159
VNE
Flaps Take-Off (T/O)

KIAS
40
KCAS
50
VS1
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
53
57
61
65
69
73
77
81
85
89
93
96
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
100
VFE
Flaps Landing (LDG)

KIAS
36
KCAS
45
VS0
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
48
52
55
59
64
68
72
76
82
81
VFE
Example: CRUISE Flap KIAS = 90 kts, therefore KCAS = 92 kts from chart
Page 5 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Performance
5.3.2 Cruising Performance

Maximum RPM is 2800.
TEMPERATURE ( 0 C)
-20
-10
+10
+20
+30
+40
+50
+60
16000
1400
0 ft
14000
1200
0 ft
1000
0 ft
8000
ft
6000
ft
4000
ft
2000
ft
ST
12000
AN
DA
10000
RD
TE
MP
8000
ER
AT
6000
UR
E
EQUIVALENT ALTITUDE (FT)
18000
4000
2000
Sea
Leve
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
. L R
AX AI E
M AV OW
P
- 2000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
20
21
22
23
TEMPERATURE ( 0 F)
Example:
OAT: ....................................... 70 F
Pressure Altitude:................... 5000 ft
Desired Power Setting: .......... 60%
Result:
Set RPM: ............................... 2560
24
25
26
27
28
29
RPM X 100
Figure 5.1 - Cruising Performance
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 5 - 5
DOT Approved
Performance
5.3.3 Equivalent Altitude Chart
18,000
16,000 ft
Pressure Altitude
14,000 ft
16,000
12,000 ft
14,000
Equivalent Altitude, ft
12,000
10,000 ft
10,000
Standard
Temperature
8000 ft
8,000
6000 ft
6,000
4000 ft
4,000
2000 ft
2,000
Sea Level
- 2,000
- 40
-20
0
20
Outside Air Temperature,C
40
Figure 5.2 - Equivalent Altitude Chart
Page 5 - 6
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Performance
5.3.4 Stall Speeds

Configuration:
Idle, most forward center of gravity, max. weight of 1764 lbs (800 kg).
(This is the most adverse configuration)
Table 2 - Stall Speeds

Most Forward Center of Gravity
Angle of Bank
Flap
Setting
30
45
60
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
KIAS
KCAS
Cruise
44
54
49
58
57
64
72
76
Take-off
40
50
46
53
53
59
66
70
Landing
36
45
41
49
48
54
61
64
NOTE
The Stall Speeds are in kts.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 5 - 7
DOT Approved
Performance
5.3.5 Wind Components
Maximum demonstrated crosswind component:...........20 kts (37 km/h)

0
[kts]
10
20
30
FLIGHT DIRECTION
[km/h]
25
40
Wi
nd
sp
50
ee
in
kt
ct
io
20
40
fli
max. demonstrated crosswind
10
d
an
nd
wi
n
ee
tw
be
e
gl
10
an
20
HEADWIND COMPONENT
15
gh
td
ire
30
60
70
80
90
10
100
110
10
0
170
160
150
140
130
120
CROSSWIND DIRECTION
[kts]
0
10
15
20
25
[km/h]
0
Example:
10
20
30
40
Wind Speed: ........................................................... 11 kts (20 km/h)

Angle between wind direction and flight direction: . 30 degrees
Headwind Component:........................................... 9.5 kts (18 km/h)
Crosswind Component: .......................................... 5.5 kts (10 km/h)
Figure 5.3 - Wind Components
Page 5 - 8
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
900
1000
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Total Take- off Distance, m
-10
10
Sea Level
2000 ft
4000 ft
6000 ft
8000 ft
10,000 ft
60
20
80
30
40
100
50
120
February 28, 2014

800
780
720
700
300 m
400 m
500 m
600 m
700 m
800 m
900 m
1000 m
680
1500
660
GROSS WEIGHT, (kg)
740
1600
620
1400
640
GROSS WEIGHT, (lbs)
760
1700
EXAMPLE:
- Pressure altitude ..............1000 ft
- Outside air temperature ....72
- Weight ...............................1600 lbs (725 kg)
- Wind ...................................4 kt headwind
60
1764
-5
300 m
400 m
500 m
600 m
700 m
800 m
900 m
1000 m
10
HEADWIND, (kts)
RESULT:
- Take-off distance to
clear a 16 ft (5 m) obstacle
1122 ft (341 m)
600
200 m
Poor maintenance condition of the airplane, deviation from the given

procedures as well as unfavorable conditions (i.e. high temperature,
rain, unfavorable wind conditions, including cross wind) can increase
the take-off distance considerably.
CONDITIONS:
- Maximum take-off power
- Lift-off speed 52 KIAS and speed
for climb over obstacle 58 KIAS
- Level runway, paved
- Wing flaps in T/O postition
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE, (C)
-20
40
Pressure Altitude
20
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE, (F)
15
20

Performance
5.3.6 Take-off Distance
Figure 5.4 - Take-off Distance (Sheet 1 of 2)
Page 5 - 9
DOT Approved
Page 5 - 10
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
Total Take- off Distance, m

-5
200 m
300 m
400 m
500 m
600 m
700 m
800 m
900 m
1000 m
10
15
20
0
900 m
800 m
16
200 m
300 m
400 m
500 m
600 m
700 m
7.5
25
10
33
12.5
41
15
49
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(m)
Poor maintenance condition of the airplane, deviation from the given

procedures as well as unfavorable conditions (i.e. high temperature,
rain, unfavorable wind conditions, including cross wind) can increase
the take-off distance considerably.
RESULT:
- Take-off distance to
clear a 16 ft (5 m) obstacle
1122 ft (341 m)
OBSTACLE HEIGHT, (m)
2.5
OBSTACLE HEIGHT, (ft)
EXAMPLE:
- Pressure altitude ..............1000 ft
- Outside air temperature ....72
- Weight ...............................1600 lbs (725 kg)
- Wind ...................................4 kt headwind
HEADWIND, (kts)
CONDITIONS:
- Maximum take-off power
- Lift-off speed 52 KIAS and speed
for climb over obstacle 58 KIAS
- Level runway, paved
- Wing flaps in T/O postition
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
(From Sheet 1)
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
3200
(ft)
Performance
TAKE OFF DISTANCE
Figure 5.4 - Take-off Distance (Sheet 2 of 2)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Performance
5.3.7 Climb Performance /Cruising Altitudes

Max. Cruising Altitude (in standard conditions): ................13120 ft (4000 m)
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed with Wing Flaps CRUISE ........75 KIAS
CAUTION
IN AIRPLANE OPERATIONS WITHOUT THE OPTIONAL
WHEEL FAIRINGS INSTALLED, THE CLIMB PERFORMANCE
IS REDUCED BY APPROXIMATELY 3%.
0
TEMPERATURE ( C)
0
-10
-20
+10
+20
RATE OF CLIMB (m/min)
+30
+40
+50
+60
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
0
1400
14000
1200
0 ft
1000
0 ft
8000
ft
6000
ft
4000
ft
2000
ft
12000
Equivalent Altitude
Rate of Climb
Flaps CRUISE
1764 lbs (800 kg)
ft
16000
S TA
ND
AR
10000
EM
DT
8000
PE
R AT
6000
UR
E
18000
4000
2000
Sea
Leve
-2000
0
20
40
60
80
100
0
120
140
100
200
TEMPERATURE ( F)
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1 0 0 0 11 0 0
RATE OF CLIMB (ft/min)
Example:
Pressure Altitude: ....................................... 2000 ft

OAT: ............................................................ 65 F
Weight : ...................................................... 1764 lbs (800 kg)
Result:
Climb performance: .................................... 800 ft/min

Figure 5.5 - Climb Performance / Cruising Altitudes
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 5 - 11
DOT Approved
Performance
5.3.8 Climb Performance / Take off
Best Rate-of-Climb Speed with Wing Flaps T/O: ................... 68 KIAS

TEMPERATURE ( 0C)
-20
-10
+10
+20
+30
+40

0
+50
+60
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
16000
1400
0 ft
14000
1200
0 ft
1000
0 ft
8000
ft
6000
ft
4000
ft
2000
ft
S TA
12000
Equivalent Altitude
Rate of Climb
Flaps TAKE OFF
1764 lbs (800 kg)
ND
AR
10000
EM
DT
8000
PE
R AT
6000
UR
E
18000
4000
2000
Sea
Leve
-2000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
9 0 0 1 0 0 0 11 0 0
TEMPERATURE ( F)
Example:
Pressure Altitude: ............................................. 2000 ft

OAT: .................................................................. 65 F
Weight : ............................................................ 1764 lbs
Result:
Climb performance: .......................................... 744 ft/min
Figure 5.6 - Climb Performance / Take off
Page 5 - 12
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Performance
5.3.9 Cruising Speed (True Airspeed)

Diagram for true airspeed (TAS) calculation at selected power level.
CAUTION
WHEEL FAIRINGS INSTALLED, THE MAXIMUM CRUISING
SPEED IS REDUCED BY APPROXIMATELY 5%..
TEMPERATURE ( 0 C)
-20
-10
+10
+20
+30
+40
+50
+60
1400
0 ft
14000
1200
0 ft
1000
0 ft
8000
ft
6000
ft
4000
ft
2000
ft
ST
12000
AN
DA
10000
RD
TE
MP
8000
ER
AT
6000
UR
E
%
55
50
16000
45%
18000
60
65
70
75
4000
2000
Leve
Sea
80
85%
MAX.
AVAILABLE
POWER
- 2000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
90
TEMPERATURE ( 0 F)
100
11 0
120
130
140
150
160
TAS (knots)
Example:
Pressure Altitude: ....................................... 6000 ft

OAT: ............................................................ 70 F
Power Setting: ............................................ 65%
Result:
True airspeed (TAS): .................................. 121kts

Figure 5.7 - Cruising Speed (True Airspeed)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 5 - 13
DOT Approved
Performance
5.3.10 Maximum Flight Duration
Table for calculation of the Maximum Flight Duration depending on fuel availability.
Table 3 - Cruise Performance Table
Press Alt
ft
2,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
Page 5 - 14
DOT Approved
RPM
20 C Below Standard
Temp
Standard
Temperature
10 C Above Standard
Temp
%bhp
KTAS
GPH
%bhp
KTAS
GPH
%bhp
KTAS
GPH
2800
87
128
8.8
83
129
8.7
80
130
8.6
2700
78
123
7.7
74
124
6.8
72
125
6.6
2600
69
118
6.4
66
119
6.2
64
120
6.1
2500
61
113
5.9
59
113
5.7
57
114
5.6
2400
54
107
5.3
52
108
5.2
50
109
5.1
2800
79
126
8.6
76
127
8.6
74
129
6.8
2700
71
121
6.6
68
122
6.4
66
123
6.2
2600
63
116
61
117
5.9
59
118
5.7
2500
56
111
5.5
55
112
5.4
53
113
5.3
2450
53
108
5.3
51
109
5.1
50
110
5.1
2800
73
125
6.7
70
126
6.5
69
128
6.4
2700
66
120
6.2
64
121
62
123
5.9
2600
59
115
5.7
57
116
5.6
56
117
5.5
2500
53
110
5.2
51
111
5.1
50
112
2800
68
124
6.4
66
125
6.2
65
127
6.1
2700
61
119
5.9
60
121
5.8
59
122
5.7
2600
55
114
5.4
54
116
5.3
53
117
5.3
2550
53
112
5.2
51
113
5.1
50
114
5.1
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Performance
Cruise Performance Table - Continued
Press Alt
ft
10,000
12,000
RPM
20 C Below Standard
Temp
Standard
Temperature
10 C Above Standard
Temp
%bhp
KTAS
GPH
%bhp
KTAS
GPH
%bhp
KTAS
GPH
2800
64
123
6.1
63
125
61
127
5.9
2750
61
121
5.9
60
123
5.8
59
124
5.7
2700
58
119
5.6
57
120
5.5
56
122
5.5
2650
55
116
5.4
54
118
5.3
53
119
5.3
2600
53
114
5.2
51
115
5.1
51
117
5.1
2800
61
123
5.8
60
125
5.8
59
127
5.7
2750
58
121
5.6
57
123
5.6
56
124
5.5
2700
55
118
5.4
54
120
5.4
53
122
5.3
2650
53
116
5.2
52
118
5.2
51
119
5.1
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 5 - 15
DOT Approved
Performance
5.3.11 Climb Performance / Balked Landing
Conditions:
Speed = 52 KIAS
Wing Flaps in Landing Position (LDG)
maximum take-off power
CAUTION
WHEEL FAIRINGS INSTALLED, THE CLIMB PERFORMANCE
IS REDUCED BY APPROXIMATELY 3%.
TEMPERATURE ( 0 C)
-20
-10
+10
+20
+30
+40

0
+50
+60
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
330
16000
1400
0 ft
14000
1200
0 ft
1000
0 ft
8000
ft
6000
ft
4000
ft
2000
ft
S TA
12000
Equivalent Altitude
Rate of Climb
Flaps LANDING
1764 lbs (800 kg)
ND
AR
10000
P
EM
DT
8000
ER
AT U
6000
RE
18000
4000
2000
Sea
Leve
-2000
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1 0 0 0 11 0 0
TEMPERATURE ( F)
Example:
Pressure altitude: .............................................. 2000 ft

Outside temperature: ........................................ 70 F
Result:
Climb performance during balked landing: ...... 374 ft/min

Figure 5.8 - Climb Performance / Balked Landing
Page 5 - 16
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Performance
5.3.12 Landing Distance

Conditions:
- Throttle at Idle
- Maximum T/O Weight
- Approach Speed ....................... 55 KIAS
- Level Runway, paved
- Wing Flaps in Landing position (LDG)
- Standard Setting, MSL
Landing distance over a 50 ft (15 m) obstacle: .......... approx. 1360 ft (414m)

Landing roll distance: ................................................. approx. 661 ft (201m)
Table 4 - Landing and Rolling Distances for Heights Above MSL
Height above
MSL
Landing
Distance
Landing Roll
Distance
ft.
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
(m)
(0)
(305)
(610)
(914)
(1219)
(1524)
(1829)
(2134)
ft.
1360
1387
1417
1447
1478
1511
1545
1580
(m)
(415)
(423)
(432)
(441)
(450)
(461)
(471)
(482)
ft.
661
680
701
722
744
767
791
815
(m)
(201)
(207)
(214)
(220)
(227)
(234)
(241)
(248)
NOTE
Poor maintenance condition of the airplane, deviation from the
given procedures as well as unfavorable outside conditions (i. e.
high temperature, rain, unfavorable wind conditions, slippery
runway) could increase the landing distance considerably.
NOTE
Aircraft with ground idle speed set to 1000 RPM, landing distance
increased approx. 5% and ground roll increased approx. 7%.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 5 - 17
DOT Approved
Performance
5.4
NOISE DATA
Table 5 - Noise Data
Noise Measurement Method
Noise Value
Maximum Allowable
FAR36 Appendix G
71.7 dBA
75.7 dBA
ICAO Annex 16, Appendix 6

Paragraph 10.4(a)
74.4 dBA
80.1 dBA
ICAO Annex 16, Appendix 6

Paragraph 10.4(b) (EASA Approval)
75.25 dBA
75.25 dBA
Page 5 - 18
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Weight and Balance
CHAPTER 6
WEIGHT AND BALANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
6.1
INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................3
6.2
AIRPLANE WEIGHING ...................................................................................4
6.3
WEIGHT AND BALANCE REPORT................................................................7
6.4
FLIGHT WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY .............................................9
6.5
EQUIPMENT LIST .......................................................................................13
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 1
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance
Page 6 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
6.1
Weight and Balance
INTRODUCTION
To obtain the performance, flight characteristics and safe operation described in this
Flight Manual, the airplane must be operated within the permissible weight and balance
envelope as described in Chapter 2. It is the pilot's responsibility to adhere to the weight
and balance limitations and to take into consideration the change of the center of gravity
(CG) position due to fuel consumption.
The procedure for weighing the airplane and calculating the empty weight CG position
are given in this Chapter.
The aircraft is weighed when new and should be weighed again in accordance with
applicable air regulations. Empty weight and the center of gravity are recorded in a
Weighing Report and in the Weight & Balance Report, included at the back of this
manual.
In case of equipment changes, the new weight and empty weight CG position must be
determined by calculation or by weighing and must be entered in the Weight & Balance
Report. These sample forms are included in this manual and can be used for airplane
weighing, calculation of the empty weight CG position, and for the determination of the
useful load.
NOTE
After every repair, painting or change of equipment, the new
empty weight must be determined as required by applicable air
regulations. Weight, empty weight, CG position, and useful load
must be entered in the Weight & Balance Report by an authorized
personnel.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 3
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance
6.2
AIRPLANE WEIGHING
Pre-weighing conditions:
- equipment must be in accordance with the airplane equipment list
- brake fluid, lubricant (6 US qt / 5.7 liters) and
- unusable fuel, included (2 liters unusable, 3.18 lbs/1.44 Kg)
To determine the empty weight and the empty weight CG position, the airplane must be
positioned in the above mentioned pre-weighing condition, with the nose gear and each
main gear on a scale. Ensure that the aircraft is level longitudinally and laterally as
illustrated in Figures 6.1 and 6.2.
With the airplane correctly positioned, a plumb line is dropped from the leading edge of
each wing at the root rib to the floor; join these two points to determine the reference
datum (RD). From this line use a suspended plumb line aligned with each landing axle
gear to measure the distances X (nose gear), X2LH (left main gear) and X2RH (right main
gear).
The following formulas apply:
Finding Empty - Center of Gravity (XCG)
Empty Weight:
G = G1+ G2LH + G2RH lbs [kg]
Empty Weight CG Formula:
XCG =
(G1 x X1)+(G2LH x X2LH)+(G2RH x X2RH)

G1 + G2LH + G2RH
Finding Empty - Weight Moment

Empty-weight Moment:
M = Empty Weight (G) x Empty-weight CG (XCG)
CAUTION
ITEMS FORWARD OF THE REFERENCE DATUM ARE
CONSIDERED TO HAVE A NEGATIVE LEVER ARM. ITEMS
AFT OF THE REFERENCE DATUM ARE CONSIDERED TO
HAVE A POSITIVE LEVER ARM.
Record the data in the Weighing Report included at the back of this manual.
Figure 6.3, Sample Weighing Report is for reference only.
Page 6 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Weight and Balance
Figure 6.1 - Longitudinal Leveling Diagram

Legend:
X1
Arm - Datum to center line nose wheel
X2
Arm - Datum to C/L main wheels (LH and RH)
G1
Net weight - Nose wheel
G2
Net weight - Main wheels (LH and RH)
Empty weight
XCG
Arm - Empty - weight (Calculated)
Figure 6.2 - Lateral Leveling Diagram

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 5
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance

Model: DA20-C1
Serial Number _____________
Registration _____________
Data with reference to the Type Certificate Data Sheet and the Flight Manual
Reference Datum:
Leading edge of wing at root rib.
Horizontal reference line:
Wedge 1000:55.84, 2000mm (78.7 in) aft of the step in the fuselage
at the canopy edge.
Equipment list - dated _________________ Cause for Weighing ___________________________

Weight and Balance Calculations
Weight Condition:
Include brake fluid, engine oil and Unusable fuel (Type 2 system, 2 liters unusable, 3.18 lbs/1.44 Kg)
Finding Empty Weight:
Finding Arm: (Measured)
Gross
([kg]) (lbs)
Support
Tare
([kg]) (lbs)
Net Weight
([kg]) (lbs)
Lever Arm
([m]) (in)
X1 =
Front G1
Rear G2LH
X2LH =
Rear G2RH
X2RH =
EMPTY WEIGHT (G)
Finding Empty - Center of Gravity (XCG)

Empty Weight CG Formula:
(G1 x X1)+(G2LH x X2LH)+(G2RH x X2RH)
XCG =
G1 + G2LH + G2RH
Finding Empty - Weight Moment

Empty-weight Moment:
M = Empty Weight (G) x Empty-weight CG
(Positive results indicate, that CG is located aft of RD)
__________________
Finding the Maximum Permitted Useful Load:
Maximum Weight [kg] (lbs)
800 kg/1764 lbs
Empty Weight [kg] (lbs)

Maximum useful Load [kg] (lbs)
Empty Weight (G):
([kg]) (lbs)
Place/Date
Empty-weight Moment (M):

([kg.m]) (in.lbs)
Authorizing Stamp
Authorizing Signature
Figure 6.3 - Weighing Report

Page 6 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
6.3
Weight and Balance
WEIGHT AND BALANCE REPORT

The empty weight and Empty Weight CG position data determined prior to delivery of the
airplane is the first entry in the Weight and Balance Report. Each change of the installed
equipment as well as each repair affecting the empty weight, the CG position of the
empty weight or the empty weight moment must be entered in the Weight and Balance
Report included at the back of this manual. The following Sample Weight and Balance
Report (see Figure 6.4) is for reference only.
Ensure that you are using the latest weight and balance information when performing a
weight and balance calculation
.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 7
DOT Approved
Continuous report of structural changes or change of equipment
Weight and Balance
Figure 6.4 - Sample Weight and Balance Report

Page 6 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
6.4
Weight and Balance
FLIGHT WEIGHT AND CENTER OF GRAVITY

The following data enables the pilot to operate the DA20-C1 within the required weight
and center of gravity limitations.
The following diagrams,
Figure 6.5 Loading Plan
Figure 6.6 Weight & Balance Diagram
Figure 6.7 Calculation of Loading Condition
Figure 6.8 Permissible Center of Gravity Range and permissible Flight-Weight-Moment
are to be used for calculations of the flight-weight and the center of gravity as follows:
(a) The empty weight and the empty-weight-moment of the airplane should be taken
from the weighing report or from the weight & balance report and entered into the
form Calculation of Loading Condition (see Figure 6.7) in the columns identified
with Your DA20-C1.
(b) Using the Weight & Balance Diagram (see Figure 6.6) determine the moment for
each part to be loaded, and enter it in the respective column in Figure 6.7.
(c) Add the weights and the moments of each column (point 4 and point 6 in Figure 6.7)
and enter the sum in Figure 6.8 Permissible CG Range and Permissible
Flight-Weight-Moment to check if the values are within the permissible limits of the
loading range.
Figure 6.5 - Loading Plan

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 9
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance
Load Moment (kg.m)

10
20
30
40
50
60
600
250
500
200
&C
o-P
ilo
300
Load (kg)
150
Pil
ot
Load (lbs)
400
100
200
Max. Usable Fuel 24.5 US Gal (93 Liters)
Max. Usable Fuel 21.3 US Gal (80.5 Liters)
Fue
100
1
(6.0
per
lbs
US
72
l./0.
er
kg p
liter
50
ga
Max. Baggage 44 lbs (20 kg)
ge
gga
Ba
1000
Example:
nsion
ge Exte
Bagga
2000
4000
3000
Load Moment (in.lbs)
5000
Pilot and Passenger:
359 lbs. (163 kg)
Fuel 14.0 US gal. / 52.9 liters:
93 lbs. (42 kg)
(6.01 lbs. per US gal./0.72 kg per liter)

Result:
Moment of Pilot and Passenger:
2021 in. lbs. (24.4 kgm)
Moment of Fuel:
3017 in. lbs. (34.8 kgm)
Figure 6.6 - Weight & Balance Diagram

Page 6 - 10
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Weight and Balance
DA20-C1 (EXAMPLE)
Calculation of the Load
Limits
YOUR DA20-C1
Weight [lbs]
(Weight [kg])
Moment [in.lbs]
([kgm])
Empty Weight (use the data

for your airplane recorded in
the equipment list, including
unusable fuel and lubricant).
1153
(523)
12562
(144.740)
2.
Pilot and Passenger:

Lever Arm: 0.143 m (5.63 in)
359
(163)
2021
(23.286)
3.
Baggage:
Max. Wt. 44 lbs (20 kg)
Lever Arm: 0.824 m (32.44 in)
-(--)
-(--)
4.
Baggage Compartment
Extension:
Lever Arm: 1.575 m (62.0 in)
-(--)
-(--)
5.
*Combined Baggage
Lever Arm: 1.20 m (47.22 in)
-(--)
-(--)
6.
Total Weight and Total

Moment with empty fuel tank
(sum of 1. - 3.)
1512
(686)
14583
(168.026)
7.
Usable Fuel Load

(6.01 lbs. per US gal./0.72 kg
per liter)
Lever Arm (32.44 in)
(0.824 m)
93
(42)
3017
(34.762)
8.
Total Weight and Total

Moment, taking fuel into
account (sum of 6. and 7.)
1605
(728)
17600
(202.788)
9.
Find the values for the total weight (1512 lbs and 1605 lbs) and the total moment (14583 in lbs and
17600 in. lbs) in the center of gravity diagram. Since they are within the limitation range, the loading is
permissible.
1.
Weight [lbs]
(Weight [kg])
Moment [in.lbs]
([kgm])
* Combined Baggage: For convenience of calculation use this line if baggage is to be

located in both the baggage compartment and the baggage extension.
The combined total of the baggage must not exceed 44 lbs (20 kg).
Figure 6.7 - Calculation of Loading Condition
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 11
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance
P E R MIS S IB LE F LIG HT - W E IG HT - MOME NT (kg m)

105
120
140
160
180
200
220
240
1700
750
1600
700
1500
650
1400
600
1300
F LIG HT - W E IG HT (kgs )
800
1764
550
1200
9000
11000
13000
15000
17000
19000
21000
P E R MIS S IB LE F LIG HT - W E IG HT - MOME NT (in lbs )
See an example calculation of loading condition in Figure 6.7. Change in center of gravity
is due to fuel consumption
Figure 6.8 - Permissible Center of Gravity Range and Permissible Flight-Weight-Moment
Page 6 - 12
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
6.5
Weight and Balance
EQUIPMENT LIST
The following table lists all the equipment available for this airplane. An Equipment
Record of items installed in your specific airplane is included in the back of this manual.
The equipment list comprises the following data:
-
The item No. containing an ATA Specification 100 reference number for the
equipment group and a sequential number.
Abbreviations:
A
Avionics
Instruments
Miscellaneous (any equipment other than avionics or instruments)
Weight and lever arm of the equipment items are shown in the columns Weight and
Arm.
NOTE
Additional installation of equipment must be carried out in
compliance with the specifications in the Maintenance Manual.
The columns Weight and Arm show the weight and the CG
position of the equipment with respect to the reference datum.
A positive value shows the distance aft of the reference datum.
A negative value shows the distance forward of the reference
datum.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 6 - 13
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
22-001
Part Description,
Manufacturer Part/Model No.
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
2.2
-16.4
(1.0)
(-0.42)
1.1
-27.4
S-TEC 01261-54-14
(0.5)
(-0.69)
Autopilot Roll Servo
2.9
43.5
(1.3)
(1.11)
2.9
43.5
(1.3)
(1.11)
0.4
64
(0.1)
(1.63)
0.5
-15.5
(0.2)
(-0.39)
3.9
-20.5
Bendix/King KX 125
(1.8)
(-0.52)
VHF Comm Antenna
0.5
43.5
(0.2)
(1.11)
0.8
-16.4
(0.4)
(-0.42)
1.7
-17.2
(0.8)
(-0.44)
5.5
-19.5
(2.5)
(-0.49)
4.4
-20.5
(2.0)
(-0.52)
GPS Antenna
0.4
64
Garmin GA56
(0.1)
(1.6)
GPS Antenna
0.2
-20.5
(0.1)
(-0.52)
Autopilot Turn Coordinator/Roll Computer

S-TEC 01260-12-0-14
22-002
22-003
Autopilot Pitch Computer
S-TEC 0105-R2
22-004
Autopilot Pitch Servo

S-TEC 0107-P4
23-001
GPS Antenna
King KA 92
23-002
Intercom
PS Engineering PM501
23-003
23-004
Nav / Com
Comant CI 122
23-005
Audio Panel
Bendix/King KA 134
23-006
Audio Panel w/ Marker Receiver

Bendix/King KMA 24
23-007
Nav / Com w/ GS
Bendix/King KX 155
23-008
GPS/Comm
Bendix/King KLX 135A
23-009
23-010
Garmin GPS 150
Page 6 - 14
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
23-011
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
0.8
-17.2
(0.4)
(-0.44)
1.0
-20.5
(0.4)
(-0.52)
2.8
-20.5
(1.3)
(-0.52)
2.4
-20.5
(1.1)
(-0.52)
2.1
-20.5
(0.95)
(-0.52)
0.2
-16.4
(0.1)
(-0.42)
4.5
45.6
Diamond Service Bulletin # DAC1-24-02
(2.0)
(1.16)
Battery, GIL G-35M
26.3
57.5
(11.9)
(1.46)
Battery, standard C0001-C0148, C0150
15.3
57.5
Yuasa Y50N18L-A-CX
(6.9)
(1.46)
Battery, standard (S/N C0149, C0151 onwards)
15.3
-35
Yuasa Y50N18L-A-CX
(6.9)
(-0.89)
2.6
-23.6
Service Bulletin # DAC1-24-06
(1.2)
(-0.6)
Battery, B&C Specialty Products
22.5
56
(10.2)
(1.42)
0.3
-16.4
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.3
-17.4
(0.14)
(-0.44)
0.3
-17.4
(0.14)
(-0.44)
Audio Panel w/Marker Receiver

PMA 6000
23-012
Audio Panel
Garmin GMA 340
23-013
Com
Bendix/King KY97A
23-014
Com
Icom IC A200 TSO
23-015
Com
GARMIN AT SL 40
24-001
Ammeter
VDO 190-031SB2
24-002
24-003
24-004
24-005
24-006
EPU Kit (S/N C0001-C0148, C0150)
EPU Installation (S/N C0149, C0151 onwards) Diamond
BC100-1 (S/N C0001 to C0148, C0150)

24-007
Voltmeter
VDO 332-041-SB2
24-008
Ammeter
22-2430-02-00
24-009
Voltemeter
22-2430-01-00
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 6 - 15
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
25-001
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
2.8
44.8
(1.3)
(1.14)
4.5
12
(2.1)
(0.30)
5.6
12
(2.6)
(0.30)
2.3
28
(1.0)
(0.71)
3.2
158.0
(1.5)
(4.0)
3.7
40.3
(1.68)
(1.02)
0.12
-19.4
(0.05)
(-0.49)
0.2
-16.4
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.2
-16.4
VDO 301-035
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.25
-17.4
22-2840-01-00
(0.11)
(-0.44)
0.5
-15.5
Hobbs 85000
(0.2)
(-0.39)
Chronometer
0.2
-15.5
Davtron M800
(0.1)
(-0.39)
Chronometer
0.3
-15.5
Davtron M803
(0.1)
(-0.39)
2.7
27.6
(1.2)
(0.70)
2.7
-44.8
(1.2)
(-1.14)
Emergency Locator Transmitter

EBC 502
25-002
Seat Cushion, standard

RH 22-2510-20-00 , LH 22-2510-19-00
25-003
Seat Cushion, leather

RH 22-2510-10-00 , LH 22-2510-09-00
25-004
Fire Extinguisher
AMEREX A620
25-005
ELT Installation Artex ELT-200 (Includes ELT, Antenna,

Remote Switch and Harness)
25-006
ELT Installation Artex ME406 (Includes ELT, Antenna,

Remote Switch and Harness)
27-001
Flap Control Module

22-2753-00-00
28-001

22-2840-00-00
28-002
28-003
31-001
31-002
31-003
32-001
Auxiliary Fuel Quantity Indicator
Hour Meter
Wheel Fairing, Main Gear

RH 22-3210-06-00 , LH 22-3210-05-00
32-002
Wheel Fairing, Nose Gear

20-3220-13-00
Page 6 - 16
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
33-001
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
2.5
(1.1)
0.6
16.4
(0.3)
(-0.42)
0.6
-16.4
Aero Enhancements
(0.3)
(-0.42)
Light Dimmer Assembly
0.15
-21.4
22-3313-00-00
(0.7)
(-0.54)
0.8
-22.5
(0.4)
(-0.57)
0.6
-22.5
(0.3)
(-0.57)
0.4
-20.0
SSD 120-30N
(0.2)
(-0.51)
Nav Indicator
1.1
-16.4
(0.5)
(-0.42)
0.5
-15.5
(0.2)
(-0.39)
0.5
-15.5
Davtron 301C
(0.2)
(-0.39)
Transponder
3.0
-20.5
(1.4)
(-0.52)
2.1
-20.5
(1.0)
(-0.52)
2.1
-20.5
(1.0)
(-0.52)
1.2
-17.4
(0.5)
(-0.44)
0.2
54.1
(0.1)
(1.37)
Recognition Light Kit

33-002
Light Dimmer Module

White Wire WW-LCM 001
33-003
33.004
34-001
Flood Light
Encoder
SSD 120-20
34-002
Encoder
SSD 120-30
34-002a
34-003
Encoder
King KI 208
34-004
Outside Air Temperature Indicator (F)

Davtron 301F
34-005
34-006
Outside Air Temperature Indicator (C)
Bendix/King KT 76A
34-007
GPS
Garmin GPS150
34-008
GPS
Bendix/King KLN 35A
34-009
Nav Indicator
King KI 209
34-010
Transponder Antenna
KA 60
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 6 - 17
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
34-011
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
0.9
-16.4
(0.4)
(-0.42)
0.8
-15
Airpath C2300L4
(0.3)
(-0.38)
Turn Coordinator
1.2
-16.4
(0.5)
(-0.42)
1.4
-16.4
MCI 1394T100-7B
(0.6)
(-0.42)
Airspeed Indicator
0.7
-16.4
United 8000B800
(0.3)
(-0.42)
0.8
-16.4
(0.4)
(-0.42)
2.0
-16.4
(0.9)
(-0.42)
2.3
-16.4
(1.0)
(-0.42)
2.6
-16.4
(1.2)
(-0.42)
2.7
-16.4
(1.2)
(-0.42)
0.3
-16.4
Varga 5001
(0.1)
(-0.42)
Chronometer Marker Beacon Antenna
0.25
-153.6
Davtron M800KA 26
(0.1)
(-3.90)
0.2
-38.5
(0.1)
(-0.98)
1.6
-18.0
(0.7)
(-0.46)
3.0
-20.5
(1.3)
(-0.52)
Altimeter
United 5934PD3
34-012
34-013
Compass
EGC 1394T100-7Z
34-013a
34-014
34-015
Turn Coordinator

United 7000
34-016
Artificial Horizon
Sigma Tek 23-501-06-16
34-017
Artificial Horizon
Sigma Tek 23-501-035-5
34-018
Directional Gyro
Sigma Tek 1U262-001-39
34-019
Directional Gyro
Sigma Tek 1U262-007-40
34-020
34-021
34-022
Vacuum Gauge
Transponder Antenna
Bendix/King KA60
34-023
Transponder
Garmin GTX320
34-024
Transponder
Bendix/King KT76C
Page 6 - 18
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
34-025
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
2.2
-20.5
(1.0)
(-0.52)
6.5
-20.5
(3.0)
(-0.42)
5.8
-20.5
(2.6)
(-0.42)
3.4
-20.5
(1.5)
(-0.42)
3.6
-20.5
(1.6)
(-0.42)
1.4
-17.4
Garmin Gl106A
(0.6)
(-0.44)
GPS/Nav/Com
8.5
20.5
(3.8)
(0.42)
6.8
55.5
Avidyne 70-2420-7 TAS600
(3.1)
(1.41)
Traffic Advisory System Antenna, Top
0.66
64.6
Sensor Systems S72-1750-31L
(0.3)
(1.64)
Traffic Advisory System Antenna, Bottom
0.75
7.9
Sensor Systems S72-1750-32L
(0.3)
(0.20)
0.5
56.7
(0.2)
(1.44)
4.2
-20.5
Garmin GTX 328
(1.9)
(-0.52)
Intercom System
0.75
-15.5
PS Engineering Incorporated PM 1000
(0.3)
(-0.39)
1.6
-20.5
(0.7)
(-0.52)
6.4
-20.5
(2.9)
(-0.52)
Digital Transponder
Garmin GTX 327
34-026
GPS/Nav/Com
Garmin GNS 430
34-027
GPS/Com
Garmin GNC 420
34-028
GPS/Com
Garmin GNC 300XL
34-029
TCAD (Traffic Collision Alerting Device)

Ryan 8800 Gold
34-030
34-031
CDI
Garmin GNS 530

34-032
34-033
34-034
34-035
Traffic Advisory System Processor
Traffic Advisory System Transponder Coupler

Avidyne 70-2040
34-036
34-037
34-038
Digital Transponder
Artificial Horizon Indicator

Mid Continent
34-039
Garmin Display Unit (GDU) 620 (PFD/MFD)

Garmin G500
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 6 - 19
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
34-040
Garmin Data Computer (GDC) 74A (Air Data Computer)
1.6
-15.0
(0.7)
(-0.38)
2.8
63.0
(1.27)
(1.6)
Garmin Magnetometer Unit (GMU) 44
0.35
110.2
Garmin G500
(0.2)
(2.8)
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
0.05
-23.5
Garmin GTP 59
(0.02)
(-0.60)
GPS/Nav/Comm
4.2
-21.5
Garmin GTN 650
(1.9)
(-0.54)
Comm
2.36
-21.5
Garmin GTR 225
(1.07)
(-0.54)
Artificial Horizon
2.5
-17.4
(1.13)
(-0.44)
Propeller and Spinner
11.9
-60.8
Sensenich W69EK-63
(5.4)
(-1.54)
Propeller and Spinner
12.7
60.8
Sensenich W69EK7-63 and W69EK7-63G
(5.7)
(-1.54)
1.1
45.5
(0.5)
(1.16)
0.4
-33.5
(0.2)
(-0.85)
0.3
-15.5
(0.1)
(-0.39)
0.3
-17.4
(0.14)
(-0.44)
0.3
-16.4
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.8
-16.4
(0.4)
(-0.42)
Garmin G500
34-041
Garmin Reference System (GRS) 77 [(Attitude and

Heading Reference System (AHRS)]
Garmin G500
34-042
34-043
34-044
34-045
34-046
Mid Continent 4300-206

61-002
61-003
71-001
Heater
Tanis TAS100-29
71-002
Winter Kit
73-001

22-7330-00-01
73-002

22-7330-03-00
77-001
Cylinder Head Temp. Indicator

22-7720-00-00
77-002
RPM Indicator 22-7710-20-00 or

Mitchell CD-122-4020
Page 6 - 20
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Weight and Balance

Equipment List
Item
Number
77-003
Part Description,
Weight
lbs (kg)
Arm
in (m)
0.8
-16.4
(0.4)
(-0.42)
0.8
-16.4
(0.4)
(-0.42)
0.2
-16.4
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.7
-16.4
(0.3)
(-0.42)
Vision Microsystems VM-1000
1.3
-20
4010066 Data Processing Unit
(0.6)
(-0.51)
Lighted RPM Indicator Recording
0.7
-16.4
Superior Labs SL1010-5503-13-H03
(0.3)
(-0.42)
EGT Indicator
0.3
-15.5
22-7720-00-02
(0.1)
(-0.39)
EGT Indicator
0.25
-17.4
22-7720-04-00
(0.11)
(-0.44)
CHT Indicator
0.25
-17.4
22-7720-03-00
(0.11)
(-0.44)
0.3
-16.4
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.3
-16.4
22-7930-00-01
(0.1)
(-0.42)
0.25
-17.4
22-7931-02-00
(0.11)
(-0.44)
0.25
-17.4
22-7930-04-00
(0.11)
(-0.44)
RPM Indicator Recording

Superior Labs SL1010-55000-13-N00
77-004

4010050 Main Display
77-005

4010320 Fuel Display
77-006

4010055 EC 100
77-007
77-008
78-001
78-002
78-003
79-001
Oil Pressure Kit (Indicator only)

22-7930-10-00
79-002
79-003
79-004
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page 6 - 21
DOT Approved
Weight and Balance
Page 6 - 22
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Airplane Description
CHAPTER 7
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE
AND ITS SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
7.1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................5
7.2
AIRFRAME ............................................................................................5
7.3
7.4
7.2.1
Fuselage ................................................................................5
7.2.2
Wings ....................................................................................5
7.2.3
Empennage ...........................................................................5
FLIGHT CONTROLS .............................................................................6

7.3.1
Trim System ..........................................................................6
7.3.2
Flaps ......................................................................................6
7.3.3
Flap Position Indicator ...........................................................7
7.3.4
Pedal Adjustment .................................................................7
7.3.5
Flight Control Lock ................................................................8
INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................................10

7.4.1
Flight Instruments ................................................................12
7.4.2
Cabin Heat ..........................................................................12
7.4.3
Cabin Air ..............................................................................12
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 1

Page
7.5
LANDING GEAR SYSTEM ..................................................................13

7.5.1
Wheel Brakes .....................................................................13
7.5.2
Parking Brake ......................................................................13
7.6
SEATS AND SAFETY BELTS ..............................................................15
7.7
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT .............................................................15
7.8
CANOPY .............................................................................................16
7.9
POWERPLANT ....................................................................................18
7.10
Page 7 - 2
7.9.1
Engine .................................................................................18
7.9.2
Engine Controls ...................................................................19
7.9.3
Mixture Control ....................................................................20
7.9.4
Propeller ..............................................................................20
7.9.5
Lubricating ..........................................................................21
FUEL SYSTEM ....................................................................................22

7.10.1
Fuel Shut-off Valve .............................................................24
7.10.2
Tank Drain ...........................................................................24
7.10.3
Fuel Filter Bowl ....................................................................24
7.10.4
Fuel Filter Bowl Drain ..........................................................24
7.10.5
Fuel Dipstick ........................................................................25
7.10.6
Electric Fuel Pump (Priming Pump) Operation ....................26
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
PAGE
7.11
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .......................................................................27

7.11.1
Power Supply ......................................................................27
7.11.2
Ignition System ....................................................................27
7.11.3
Electrical Powered Equipment ............................................28
7.11.4
Voltmeter .............................................................................28
7.11.5
Ammeter ..............................................................................28
7.11.6
Generator Warning Light .....................................................28
7.11.7
Instruments ..........................................................................28
7.11.8
Internal Lighting ...................................................................29
7.12
PITOT AND STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEMS .....................................30
7.13
STALL WARNING SYSTEM ................................................................30
7.14
AVIONICS ............................................................................................31
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 3
Page 7 - 4
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
7.1
INTRODUCTION
Chapter 7 provides a description and operation of the airplane and its systems.
Refer to Chapter 9, Supplements, for details of optional systems and equipment.
7.2
AIRFRAME
7.2.1 Fuselage
The GFRP-fuselage is of semi-monocoque construction. The fire protection cover
on the fire wall is made from a special fire retarding ceramic fiber that is covered by
a stainless steel plate on the engine side. The main bulkhead is of CFRP/GFRP
construction.
The instrument panel is made of aluminum.
7.2.2 Wings
The GFRP-wings are of semi-monocoque sandwich construction, and contain a
CFRP-spar. The ailerons and flaps are made from CFRP and are attached to the
wings using stainless steel and aluminum hinges.
The wing-fuselage connection is made with three bolts each. The A- and B- bolts
are fixed to the fuselage's root rib. The A-bolt is placed in front of the spar bridge;
the B-bolt is near the trailing edge on each side of the fuselage. The two main bolts
are placed in the middle of the spar bridge structure. They are accessible behind
the seats and are inserted from the front side. A spring-loaded hook locks both bolt
handles, securing them in place.
7.2.3 Empennage
The rudder and elevator units are of semi-monocoque sandwich construction. The
vertical stabilizer contains a di-pole antenna for the VHF radio equipment. The
horizontal stabilizer contains an antenna for the NAV equipment (VOR).
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 7 - 5
7.3
FLIGHT CONTROLS
The ailerons and elevator are actuated via push rods. The rudder is controlled using
control cables. The flaps have three positions, CRUISE, T/O (take-off), LDG
(landing), and are electrically operated. The switch is located on the instrument
panel. The flap control circuit breaker can be manually tripped to disable the flap
system. Elevator forces may be balanced using the electric trim system.
7.3.1 Trim System

The Rocker switch is located on center console behind the throttle quadrant. The
digital trim indicator is located in the upper instrument panel.
The switch controls an electrical actuator beside the vertical push rod in the vertical
stabilizer. The actuator applies a load to compression springs on the elevator
pushrod. The trim circuit breaker is located in the circuit breaker panel and can be
tripped manually to disable the system.
switch forward = nose down
7.3.2 Flaps
The flaps are driven by an electric motor. The flaps are controlled by a three
position flap operating switch on the instrument panel. The three positions of the
switch correspond to the position of the flaps. The top position of the switch is used
during cruise flight. When the switch is moved to a different position, the flaps move
until the selected position is reached. The cruise (fully retracted) and landing (fully
extended) positions are equipped with position switches to prevent over-traveling.
The electric flap actuator is protected by a circuit breaker (5 Amp), located on the
right side of the instrument panel, which can be manually tripped to disable the
system.
Page 7 - 6
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
7.3.3 Flap Position Indicator

The current flap position is indicated by three control lights beside the flap operating
switch.
Wing Flap Position
Light
Degrees
CRUISE
green
0 degrees
T/O
yellow
15 degrees
LDG
yellow
45 degrees
When two lights are illuminated at the same time, the flaps are in-between
positions.
7.3.4 Pedal Adjustment
NOTE
The pedals can only be adjusted on the ground.
The pedals for rudder and brakes are unlocked by pulling the T-grip located in front
of the rudder pedal sledge tubes.
NOTE
Pull the T-grip straight back. Do not pull upwards.
Forward adjustment:
Push both pedals forward with your feet while pulling

lightly on the T-grip to disengage the latch.
Backward adjustment:
Pull pedals backward to desired position by pulling on

the T-grip.
NOTE
After the T-grip is released, push the pedals forward with
your feet until they lock in place.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 7 - 7
7.3.5 Flight Control Lock

A flight control lock, P/N 20-2770-00-00_1, is provided with each aircraft and should
be installed whenever the aircraft is parked. See Figure 1, Installation and Removal
of the Control Stick.
CAUTION
FAILURE TO INSTALL THE FLIGHT CONTROL LOCK
WHENEVER THE AIRCRAFT IS PARKED MAY RESULT
IN CONTROL SYSTEM DAMAGE, DUE TO GUSTS OR
TURBULENCE.
Figure 7.1 - Installation and Removal of the Control Lock

(a) Trim the aircraft to neutral.
(b) Pull the left rudder pedals fully aft and check that they are locked in position.
(c) Hook the Control Lock's forks over the rudder pedal tubes as shown above.
(d) Push down the Control Stick's leather boot to expose the Control Stick tube,
and push the Control Stick forward against the Control Lock.
(e) Loop the straps around the Control Stick as shown, and push forward on the
Control Stick.
(f) Clip the straps into the left and right buckle receptacles located under the
instrument panel.
Page 7 - 8
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
(g) Adjust the straps as required. Straps should be tight to secure the controls
properly.
(h) TO REMOVE, push the Control Stick forward (to relieve strap tension). Unclip
the straps and remove the Control Lock. Store in the aircraft's baggage
compartment.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 7 - 9
AUTO
PILOT
60
EPU
February 12, 2013

PULSE
LANDING
NO PITCH
INFORMATION
2 MIN.
TURN COORDINATOR
OFF
TAXI
PUSH
POSITION
VOLTS
STROBE
LIGHTS
MAP
CONTROL
DAVTRON
SELECT
OFF
ON
CAUTION!
GROUND
OPERATION.
mb
975
970
FEET
DOWN
10
15
15
LB OT
H
AC S
28.8
28.7
28.6
20
20
TRIM
G
E
N
C
A
N
O
P
Y
FUEL
PUMP
OBS
AVIONIC
MASTER
HOURS
RPM
HUNDREDS
1101
25
33
OFF
ON
GEN/BAT
50 0 0 0 0
3
35
15
10
20
30

approved for VFR only, in non-icing conditions.
All aerobatic maneuvers, except for intentional
spinning which is permitted with flaps UP only are
are prohibited. See Flight Manual for other limitation.
NOSE DOWN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
IN.Hg
100 FEET PER MINUTE
UP VERTICAL SPEED
CALIBRATED
TO
20.000 FEET
10
100
21 S 15
8 ALT
FLOOD
No smoking!
DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN
PROPELLER
IS MOVING.
SERIOUS ENGINE
DAMAGE MAY
RESULT.
INSTRUMENT
12
MIC
D.C.
ELEC.
80
KNOTS
SUC I OS
T
AIRSPEED 40
100
120
140
160
O.A.T.
12:45
OFF
FUEL PRIME
10
30
W
11
21
12
15
30
18
S
T
A
R
T
OFF
24
15 16 17
21
14
33
Page 7 - 10
6
24
E
P
U
PULL
25K
Flaps
IDT
BENDIX/KING
COMM
VOL
OFF
FL
PULL
TEST
BENDIX/KING
PULL
TEST
TSO
USE
BENDIX/KING
OFF
KX 155
Iso
All
Crew
SQUELCH
COMM
USE
A
S
AUX
PULL
IDENT
SPR
MSG
ALT
CLR
ENT
Volume
Push-On
1200
ALL
ISO
ADF
D
AX
DME
N2
Nav2
C2
Com2
C1
Nav1
N1
Com1
CLR
NAV
KT76C
Squelch
PM 501
ALT
TSO
GPS
VFR
ON
PULL
SCAN
CRSR
KLX 135A
PULL
OBS
TST
OFF
SBY
XPDR
Tel/Com1
Com2/1
ENGINEERING
INCORPORATED
STANDBY/RAD
FS
OFF
Com1
Com2
Com1/2
22 23
APT VOR NDB SUP ACT NAV FPL CAL SET OTH
PULL
25K
STANDBY
Pwr/Xmt
PMA6000
040
Push-Mute
VOLUME
19 20 21
x10
165
220
VDO
AMPS
VDO
OIL
170
VDO
FUEL
60
+
240
6 9 12
16.5
PSI
125
145
420
F
300
Usable
1
2
FUEL
VDO
60
VDO
VDO
16
100
10 12 14
VOLT
VDO
OIL
30
lbs./sq.inch
1
1
600
HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 3 0
10
VDO
460
81L/21.4 US gal.
200
Cylinder Head
Temp.
100
25
50
BATTERY
TACH.
AUX.
POWER
HSI
ADF
ATC
AVIONICS
INST.
LIGHTS
ICS
TAXI/MAP
ELECTRICAL
GEN.
CONTROL
50
GEN.
DME
10
FUEL
PUMP
10
NAV/COM
1
10
POSITION
28
SYSTEM
TURN
FUEL/QTY.
&
O.A.T.
SLIP
AVIONICS
2
MARKER
MASTER
CONTROL
20
LANDING
TRIM
ENGINE
EGT
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS OIL TEMP
27
MASTER
STROBE
FLAPS
START
26
33 32 31 30

60
-
105
EGT
85
3.5
75
25
65
45
24
10
GPS/COM
2
PULSE LIGHT
PITOT
HEAT
29
7.4
15
13
INSTRUMENT PANEL
FS ENGINEERING
INCORPORATED
12
ART
ST
Figure 7.2 - Instrument Panel
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Instrument Panel Components - For Figure 7.2

Legend:
1
Intercom
Turn Coordinator
22
Transponder
Flap Switch
10
Airspeed Indicator
23
NAV Indicator
11
Vacuum Gauge
24
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Master Switch Panel
12
Artificial Horizon Indicator
25
- AVIONICS MASTER
13
Clock
26
Cylinder Head Temperature
- FUEL PUMP Switch
14
Altimeter
27
Fuel Contents Indicator
- GEN/BAT Switch
15
Magnetic Compass
28
16
RPM Indicator
29
Circuit-Breaker Panel
Ignition Switch
17
Trim Indicator
30
Voltmeter
Directional Gyro
18
Annunciator Lights
31
Engine Operated Hour

Meter
Light Switch Panel
19
Auto Selector
32
Ammeter
- Optional Switch*
20
NAV/COM GPS
33
Accessory Jack
- STROBE Light Switch
21
Transceiver
- LANDING Light Switch

- TAXI Light Switch
- POSITION Light Switch
NOTE:
Optional Switch* can be one of the following:
- Auto Pilot
- Pulse Lights
- EPU
- MAP Light
- INSTRUMENT Light
- FLOOD Light
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 11
7.4.1 Flight Instruments

The flight instruments are installed on the pilot's side of the instrument panel.
7.4.2 Cabin Heat
The cabin heat and defrost system, directs ram air through the exhaust heat shroud
into the cabin heat valve. The warm air is then directed to the window defrosting
vents and to the cabin floor as selected by the Floor/Defrost lever.
The cabin heat selector, located in the center console, is used to regulate the flow of
heated air.
Lever down = cabin heat FULL ON
The Floor/Defrost lever directs the heated air to the defrost and floor vents.
Lever down = all cabin heat to Floor
7.4.3 Cabin Air
The cabin aeration is controlled by two adjustable air-vent nozzles. The two sliding
windows in the canopy can be opened for additional ventilation.
Page 7 - 12
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.5
LANDING GEAR SYSTEM

The landing gear system consists of the two main landing gear wheels mounted to
aluminum spring struts and a 60 castering nose wheel. The suspension of the nose
wheel is provided by an elastomer spring.
The wheel fairings for the landing gear are removable. When flying without wheel
fairings, it should be noted that there is a reduction in some areas of performance
(refer to Chapter 5).
7.5.1 Wheel Brakes
CAUTION
WHEN PLACING YOUR FEET ON THE BRAKE PEDALS,
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO USE ONLY THE TOE OF
YOUR SHOE SO YOU DO NOT CONTACT THE
STRUCTURE ABOVE THE PEDALS, WHICH COULD
PREVENT
EFFECTIVE
APPLICATION
OF
THE
BRAKE(S).
Hydraulically operated disc brakes act on the wheels of the main landing gear. The
wheel brakes are operated individually using the toe-brake pedals either on the
pilot's or on the copilot's side. If either the left or right wheel brake system on the
pilots side fail, the co-pilots brakes fail too. If the co-pilots brake master cylinder or
input lines to the pilots master cylinder fails the pilots brakes will still operate.
See Figure 7.3, Brake System Schematic Diagram.
7.5.2 Parking Brake
The Parking Brake knob is located on the center console in front of the throttle
quadrant, and is pushed up when the brakes are to be released. To set the parking
brake, pull the knob down to the stop. Repeated pushing of the toe-brake pedals
will build up the required brake pressure, which will remain in effect until the parking
brake is released.
To release the parking brake, push on the toe-brake pedals before releasing the
parking brake knob.
NOTE
When parking the aircraft for longer than 12 hours place wheel
chocks in front of and behind the main landing gear wheels. Tie
down ropes should also be used if you are uncertain of
favourable climatic conditions for the duration of the park.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 13
Figure 7.3 - Brake System Schematic Diagram

Page 7 - 14
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.6
SEATS AND SAFETY BELTS

The seats are removable to facilitate the maintenance and inspection of the
underlying controls. Covers on the control sticks prevent loose objects from
entering the control area.
The seats have removable cushions.
Every seat is equipped with a four-point safety belt. To put on the safety belt, slip
the lap belt through the shoulder belt-ends and insert the lap belt-end into the belt
lock. Adjust the length of the belts so that the buckle is centered around your waist.
Tighten the belts securely. The belt is opened by pulling the lock cover.
7.7
BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
MAKE SURE THAT BAGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIMITATIONS (44 LBS/20 KG MAX.) AND AIRCRAFT
WEIGHT AND BALANCE LIMITATIONS ARE NOT
EXCEEDED.
The baggage compartment is located behind the seat above the fuel tank. Baggage
should be distributed evenly in the baggage compartment. The baggage net must
be secured.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 15
7.8
CANOPY
CAUTION
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE, THE CANOPY MUST
BE CLOSED AND LATCHED. THE RED HANDLES MUST
BE MOVED FULLY FORWARD.
AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE, THE CANOPY MUST
STAY IN THE CLOSED AND LATCHED POSITION UNTIL
THE ENGINE IS SHUT DOWN.
DURING ENGINE OPERATION IT IS PROHIBITED TO
ENTER OR EXIT THE AIRPLANE.
Closing the canopy - Close the canopy by pulling down on the canopy frame (see
Figure 7.4). Latching the canopy is accomplished by moving the two latching
handles on the left and right side of the frame to the CLOSE position.
Opening the canopy - To open the canopy, move the two latching handles on the
left and right side of the frame to the OPEN position and push up on the canopy.
NOTE
The Master Switch must be ON for the Canopy Warning
Light to be operational.
NOTE
Some aircraft are equipped with external canopy locking
handles. These do not affect operation of the inside locking
handles.
Closing the canopy from outside - Move both the LH and RH external latching
handles in the Aft Up direction to the closed position.
Opening the canopy from outside - Move both the LH and RH external latching
handles in the Fwd Down direction to the OPEN position and lift the canopy.
Page 7 - 16
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Figure 7.4 - Canopy
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 17
7.9
POWERPLANT
7.9.1 Engine
DA20-C1 aircraft are equipped with the Continental IO-240-B engine. The IO-240-B
is a fuel injected, 4 cylinder, 4 stroke engine with horizontally opposed, air cooled
cylinders and heads. The propeller drive is direct from the crankshaft.
Displacement:............................239.8 cu.in. (3.9 liters)
Max. Continuous Power: ........... 125 HP / 93.25 kW at 2800 RPM
Additional information can be found in the Engine Operating Manual.
The power plant instruments are located on the instrument panel on the co-pilot's
side. The ignition switch is a key switch located on the instrument panel in front of
the pilot. The ignition is turned on by turning the key to position BOTH. The starter
is operated by turning the switch against the spring loaded start position. If the
optional Push-to-Start ignition switch is installed, then an additional PUSH action
is required after the ignition switch is turned to the START position to start the
aircraft. The engine is shut off by moving the mixture control to the idle cutoff
position then turning the ignition switch to the off position.
The DA20-C1 may be equipped with an optional altitude compensating fuel pump.
A placard on the instrument panel indicates if this system is installed. With this
system it is not necessary to manually lean the mixture with altitude.
Page 7 - 18
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.9.2 Engine Controls

The Mixture, Throttle, and Alternate Air Control levers are grouped together in the
center console. The tension/friction for the controls can be adjusted using the
friction knob located on the right side of the center console.
Mixture Lever:
right lever with red cylindrical handle and integral lock out lever
lever full forward = Full Rich
lever full aft = Idle Cutoff
The mixture control lever features a safety lock which prevents inadvertent leaning
of the mixture. To release, squeeze the safety lock lever and the control knob
together.
Throttle:
center lever with "T" handle

lever full forward = FULL throttle
lever full aft = IDLE
Alternate Air:
left lever with square handle

lever full forward = Primary air intake
lever full aft = Alternate air intake
The alternate air control selects a second induction air intake in case of restriction of
the primary air intake (filter).
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 19
7.9.3 Mixture Control

(a) Cruise
The mixture control allows leaning of the fuel mixture to maximize fuel economy
during cruise conditions. Teledyne Continental Motors specifies that above 75%
of maximum rated power, the mixture must be set at FULL RICH. It should be
noted that even with the throttle set at the full power position, actual power may
be less than 75% of maximum rated power and then leaning is required
(reference Section 5.3.2, Cruise Performance).
(b) Reduced Throttle Settings
When operating at reduced throttle settings, other than steady state cruise, the
mixture should always be set to FULL RICH. This applies to maneuvers
(e.g.: stalls, spins, slow flight), descents, landing approaches, after landing and
while taxiing.
The only exception to this is for engines without the altitude compensating fuel
pump, operating at very high altitudes, where the low air density may require
leaning to maintain satisfactory engine operation.
(c) Full Throttle
When operating at full throttle, the mixture must be set at FULL RICH. This
applies to take-off, balked landings and climb.
The only exception is for engines without the altitude compensating fuel pump
the mixture should be leaned as actual power falls below 75% of maximum
rated power, as may be the case in an extended climb (reference Section 5.3.2,
Cruise Performance).
NOTE
All adjustment of the mixture control should be done in small
increments.
7.9.4 Propeller
The propeller is a fixed pitch Sensenich wood propeller.
Page 7 - 20
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.9.5 Lubricating
CAUTION
NEVER OPERATE THE ENGINE WITH THE OIL FILLER
CAP REMOVED. OBSERVE NORMAL PROCEDURES
AND LIMITATIONS WHILE RUNNING ENGINE.
The engine has high pressure wet sump lubrication. The oil is pumped by a
mechanical, engine driven pump. An oil dipstick indicates the level of oil in the tank.
The dipstick is marked for US quarts.
With the engine stopped, check the oil level on the dipstick. The oil level must be
between the 6 US quarts and 4 US quart level as indicated by the markings on the
dip stick. See Figure 7.5, Oil System Schematic Diagram.
Figure 7.5 - Oil System Schematic Diagram

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 21
7.10 FUEL SYSTEM

The aluminum tank is located behind the seats, below the baggage compartment.
The capacity is specified in Section 2 of this manual. The tank filler on the left side
of the fuselage behind the canopy is connected to the tank with a rubber hose. A
grounding stud is located on the under side of the fuselage near the trailing edge of
the left hand wing. The aircraft must be grounded prior to any fueling operation.
The tank vent line runs from the filler neck through the fuselage bottom skin to the
exterior of the airplane. The vent line is the translucent plastic hose adjacent to the
left wing root. The vent line must be clear for proper fuel system operation. The
tank has an integral sump which must be drained prior to each flight, by pushing up
on the brass tube which protrudes through the underside of the fuselage, forward of
the trailing edge of the left hand wing.
Two outlets with finger filters, one left and one right, are installed at the bottom of
the tank (see Figure 7.6). Fuel is gravity fed from these outlets to a filter bowl
(gascolator) and then to the electric fuel pump. The filter bowl must be drained prior
to each flight, by pushing up on the black rubber tube that protrudes through the
underside of the fuselage, adjacent to the fuel tank drain. The electric fuel pump
primes the engine for engine starting (Prime ON) and is used for low throttle
operations (Fuel Pump ON). When the pump is OFF, fuel flows through the pump's
internal bypass. From the electric pump, fuel is delivered to the engine's
mechanical fuel pump by the fuel supply line. Fuel is metered by the fuel control
unit and flows via the fuel distribution manifold to the injector nozzles.
Closing the fuel shut-off valve, located either on the aft side of the firewall or at the
maintenance drain manifold, will cause the engine to stop within a few seconds.
A return line from the mechanical pump's fuel vapor separator returns vapor and
excess fuel to the tank.
Fuel pressure is measured at the fuel distribution manifold and displayed on the fuel
pressure indicator, which is calibrated in PSI.
Some DA20-C1 aircraft also have a fuel vapor separator in the distribution manifold.
These aircraft have a second vapor return line from the distribution manifold to the
firewall.
Page 7 - 22
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Figure 7.6 - Fuel System Schematic Diagram

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 23
7.10.1 Fuel Shut-off Valve
WARNING
THE FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE SHOULD ONLY BE
CLOSED FOR EMERGENCIES OR FUEL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE.
There are two different versions of fuel shut-off valves in the DA20-C1.
Version 1
The fuel shut-off valve is located on the cabin side of the firewall and is controlled
by a handle on the right side center pedestal. To activate the fuel shutoff valve, lift
the handle release lock and pull the handle out. In the open position the knob is in.
In the closed position the knob is out.
Version 2
The fuel shut-off valve is integral to the maintenance drain manifold, located below
the fuel tank. It is actuated by the center console mounted rotary lever, via a rigid
pushrod. To activate the valve, rotate the lever clockwise from OFF to ON or lift the
lockout knob and rotate the lever counterclockwise from ON to OFF. The safety
lockout knob prevents accidental actuation of the valve.
7.10.2 TANK DRAIN
To drain the tank sump, activate the spring loaded drain by pushing the brass tube
in with a drain container. The brass tube protrudes approximately 1 1/6 in (30 mm)
from the fuselage contour and is located on the left side of the fuselage,
approximately at the same station as the fuel filler cap.
7.10.3 FUEL FILTER BOWL
The fuel filter bowl is between the tank and the fuel pump. The bowl acts as a trap
for sediment and water that has entered the fuel line from the tank.
7.10.4 FUEL FILTER BOWL DRAIN
The filter bowl drain is next to the fuel tank drain. It operates in the same manner as
the fuel tank drain.
Page 7 - 24
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.10.5 FUEL DIPSTICK

A fuel dipstick, P/N 22-2550-14-00, is supplied with all aircraft to permit direct
measurement of fuel level during the preflight check. On serial numbers C0056,
C0066, C0067 and C0069 use fuel dipstick P/N 22-2550-17-00.
NOTE
Electric fuel gauges may malfunction. Check fuel quantity
with the fuel dipstick before each flight.
To check the fuel level:
(a) Insert the graduated end of the fuel dipstick into the tank through the fuel filler
opening until the dipstick touches the bottom.
(b) Withdraw the dipstick from the fuel tank.
(c) Read the fuel quantity. The dipstick is calibrated in increments of 1/4 of useable
fuel capacity. (21.3 US gallons/80.5 liters for Type 1 Fuel System or 24.0 US
gallons/91 liters for Type 2 Fuel System).
NOTE
Several readings should be taken to confirm accuracy.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 25
7.10.6 ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP (PRIMING PUMP) OPERATION

The DA20-C1 is equipped with a DUKES constant flow, vane type, two speed, and
electric fuel pump. This pump emits an audible whine when it is switched on.
(a) Fuel Prime
The pump's high speed setting is used for priming the engine prior to engine
start. The prime setting is selected by turning the FUEL PRIME switch ON. An
amber annunciator indicates that FUEL PRIME ON is selected.
(b) Fuel Pump
The pump's low speed setting is required for maintaining positive fuel supply
system pressures at low throttle settings. This setting is selected by turning the
FUEL PUMP switch ON. This setting should be selected for any low throttle
operations, including taxiing and any flight operations when engine speed may
fall below 1000 RPM (e.g. stalls, spins, descents, landings, etc.).
The FUEL PUMP may also be selected ON to suppress suspected vapour
formation in the fuel supply system. Smooth engine operation at high ambient
temperatures with heat soaked fuel and up to and exceeding the service ceiling
has been demonstrated without use of the electric pump.
NOTE
Turning the priming pump on while the engine is running, will
enriches the mixture considerably. Although the effect is
less noticeable at high power settings when the fuel flow
rate is high, the effect at low and idle throttle settings is an
over rich mixture, which may cause rough engine operation
or engine stoppage. It is therefore recommended that for
normal operations, the FUEL PRIME be turned OFF.
Page 7 - 26
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.11 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Simplified Schematic (see Figure 7.7)
7.11.1 Power Supply
A 12 V battery is connected to the
master bus via the battery circuit
breaker (50 Amps). The 40 amp.
generator is attached to the engine
near the propeller hub. The generator
feeds the main bus via the generator
circuit breaker (50 Amps). Both circuit
breakers can be triggered manually.
The generator warning light is
activated by an internal voltage
regulator monitoring circuit and
illuminates when a generator fault
occurs.
7.11.2 Ignition System
The engine is provided with two
independent ignition systems. The
two magnetos are independent from
the power supply system, and are in
operation as soon as the propeller is
turning and the ignition switch is not
off.
This ensures safe engine
operation even in case of an
electrical power failure.
Figure 7.7 - Simplified Schematic
WARNING
IF THE IGNITION KEY IS TURNED TO L, R OR BOTH,
THE RESPECTIVE MAGNETO IS "HOT".
IF THE
PROPELLER IS MOVED DURING THIS TIME THE
ENGINE MAY START AND CAUSE SERIOUS OR FATAL
INJURY TO PERSONNEL. THE POSSIBILITY OF A HOT
MAGNETO MAY EXIST DUE TO A FAULTY SWITCH OR
AIRCRAFT WIRING.
USE EXTREME CARE AND
RESPECT WHEN IN THE VICINITY OF A PROPELLER!
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 27
7.11.3 Electrical Powered Equipment

The individual consumers (e.g. Radio, Fuel Pump, Position Lights, etc.) are
connected in series with their respective circuit breakers. See Figure 7.2 for an
illustration of the instrument panel.
7.11.4 Voltmeter
The voltmeter indicates the status of the electrical bus. It consists of a dial that is
marked numerically from 8 - 16 volts in divisions of 2.
The scale is divided into three colored arcs to indicate the seriousness of the bus
condition. These arcs are:
Red................. for 8.0 - 11.0 volts,
Yellow ............. for 11.0 - 12.5 volts,
Green ............. for 12.5 - 16.0 volts,
Redline ........... at 16.1 volts.
7.11.5 Ammeter
The ammeter indicates the charging (+) and discharging (-) of the battery.
It consists of a dial, which is marked numerically from -60 to 60 amps.
7.11.6 Generator Warning Light
The generator warning light (red) illuminates during:
-
Generator failure, no output from the generator
The only remaining power source is the battery (20 amps. for 30 minutes)
7.11.7 Instruments
The instruments for temperatures, pressures, and fuel quantity are connected to
their respective sensors. When the electrical resistance of a sensor changes it
causes a corresponding change (needle deflection) in its respective indicator.
Page 7 - 28
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.11.8 Internal Lighting

The internal lighting of the DA20-C1 is provided by a lighting module located aft of
the Pilots head and on the centerline of the aircraft. Included in this module are two
panel illumination lights and one map light. The switches for the lights are located
on the instrument panel. There is a dimming control located on the left side of the
instrument panel for adjusting the intensity of the lighting. There is a toggle switch
located beside the dimming control that controls the intensity of the Wing Flap and
Trim Annunciator. See Figure 7.8.
Care must be taken when adjusting
the lights to maintain proper
illumination. The Illumination
Pattern and Adjustment shows how
the lights are aimed in order to
provide proper panel illumination.
Aircraft equipped with
supplemental lighting (MOD 32)
have a Light Dimmer Module and a
Glare Shield mounted Flood Light.
Control of the Dimmer for backlit
instruments is through the
Instrument lighting potentiometer.
Control of the flood light is through
a potentiometer marked FLOOD.
Figure 7.8 - Illumination Pattern and Adjustment

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 29
7.12 PITOT AND STATIC PRESSURE SYSTEMS

The pitot pressure is measured on the leading edge of a calibrated probe below the
left wing. The static pressure is measured by the same probe. For protection
against water and humidity, water sumps are installed within the line. These water
sumps are accessible beneath the left seat shell.
The error in the static pressure system is negligible. For the error of the airspeed
indicating system refer to Chapter 5.
The pitot static pressure probe should be protected whenever the aircraft is parked
to prevent contamination and subsequent malfunction of the aircraft systems relying
on its proper functioning.
NOTE
Use only the factory supplied pitot static probe cover, P/N G659-200 with the Remove before Flight flag attached.
7.13 STALL WARNING SYSTEM

A stall warning horn, located in the left instrument panel, will operate at a minimum
airspeed of 5 kts before a stall. The horn grows louder as the speed approaches
the stall speed. The horn is activated by air from a suction hose that connects to a
hole in the leading edge of the left wing. The hole has a red circle around it. The
stall warning hole should be plugged whenever the aircraft is parked to prevent
contamination and subsequent malfunction of the stall warning system.
NOTE
Use only the factory supplied stall warning plug, Part
Number 22-1010-01-00 with the Remove before Flight flag
attached.
Page 7 - 30
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
7.14 AVIONICS
The center of the instrument panel contains the radio and navigation equipment.
The microphone key for the radio is installed in the control stick. There are two
connectors for headsets on the backrest of the seat.
CAUTION
HEADSETS WITH A PRESS TO TALK (PTT) SWITCH
MUST NOT BE USED IN THE HAND HELD
MICROPHONE JACK. IT CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
EQUIPMENT.
HAND HELD MICROPHONES MUST NOT BE PLUGGED
INTO CREW POSITION MICROPHONE JACKS.
DAMAGE TO THE GMA 340 AUDIO PANEL CAN OCCUR.
There is a hand-held microphone jack installed on the pilots side, on the seat
bulkhead between the fuselage and the speaker.
Operating instructions for individual avionics equipment should be taken from the
manuals of the respective manufacturers.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page 7 - 31
Page 7 - 32
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
CHAPTER 8
AIRPLANE HANDLING, CARE AND
MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
8.1
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................3
8.2
AIRPLANE INSPECTION PERIOD ........................................................3
8.3
AIRPLANE ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS .............................................3
8.4
GROUND HANDLING / ROAD TRANSPORT........................................4
8.5
8.6
8.4.1
Ground Handling .......................................................................4
8.4.2
Parking ......................................................................................4
8.4.3
Mooring......................................................................................6
8.4.4
Jacking ......................................................................................7
8.4.5
Road Transport..........................................................................8
CLEANING AND CARE..........................................................................9

8.5.1
Painted Surfaces .......................................................................9
8.5.2
Canopy ....................................................................................10
8.5.3
Propeller ..................................................................................10
8.5.4
Engine .....................................................................................10
8.5.5
Interior Surfaces, Seat and Carpets ........................................10
GROUND DE-ICING ............................................................................ 11
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 8 - 1
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
Page 8 - 2
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.1
INTRODUCTION
This Chapter contains factory-recommended procedures for proper ground
handling and servicing of the airplane. It also identifies certain inspection and
maintenance requirements which must be followed if the airplane is to retain its
original performance and dependability. It is wise to follow a planned schedule of
lubrication and preventive maintenance based on climatic and flying conditions
encountered.
8.2
AIRPLANE INSPECTION PERIOD

Inspection intervals are every 50, 100 hrs, 200 hrs and 1000 hrs of flight time and a
special 25 hour check on new airplanes. The respective maintenance procedure
can be found in the Engine Manual or the Aircraft Maintenance Manual.
8.3
AIRPLANE ALTERATIONS OR REPAIRS

It is essential that the responsible airworthiness authority be contacted prior to any
alterations on the airplane to ensure that the airworthiness of the airplane is not
affected. For repairs and painting refer to the applicable Aircraft Maintenance
Manual Doc. No. DA201-C1.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 8 - 3
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.4
GROUND HANDLING / ROAD TRANSPORT
8.4.1 Ground Handling

(a) Towing Forward
The airplane is most easily and safely maneuvered by hand with the towbar attached to the nose wheel. See Figure 8.1 for installation of tow bar.
If the aircraft is towed forward without using the tow-bar, the nose-wheel
will follow the movement of the airplane. It is recommended that the towbar be used to pull the aircraft forward. Towing the aircraft can be
assisted by pulling on the propeller at the root just next to the propeller
spinner. If any additional assistance is required, the aircraft may only be
pushed on the trailing edge of the wing tip.
Figure 8.1 - Tow Bar Installation

Page 8 - 4
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Handling, Care and

Maintenance

(b) Moving Backward
By following a simple procedure it is very easy to move the airplane

backwards.
CAUTION
DO NOT PUSH OR LIFT ON THE SPINNER!
CAUTION
DO NOT PUSH ON CONTROL SURFACES!
(1) Push down with one hand on the aft section of the fuselage near the
vertical stabilizer, to lift the nose wheel.
(2) Push back on the leading edge of the horizontal stabilizer, close to
its center.
(3) Using this technique the aircraft can easily be turned and pushed
backward. If additional assistance is required, a second person may
push on the leading edge of the wings.
8.4.2 Parking
For short time parking, the airplane must be positioned in a headwind direction, the
parking brake must be engaged, the wing flaps must be in the retracted position and
the wheels must be chocked.
For extended and unattended parking, as well as in unpredictable wind conditions,
the airplane must be anchored to the ground or placed in a hangar.
When parking the airplane, the flight controls lock, P/N 20-1000-01-00 must be
installed and pitot static probe cover and stall warning plug should be fitted (refer to
Chapter 7, Aircraft Description).
NOTE
When adjusting the rudder pedals to install the Flight
Controls Lock, pull straight back on the T-Grip. Do not
pull up.
Parking in a hangar is recommended.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 8 - 5
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.4.3 Mooring
The tail skid of the airplane has a tie down hole which can be used to moor airplane.
Tie-down rings are also installed near the midpoint on each wing for tie-down
mooring ropes. See Figure 8.2.
Figure 8.2 - Mooring Points Locations
Page 8 - 6
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Handling, Care and

Maintenance

8.4.4 Jacking
The DA20-C1 can be jacked at the two jack points located on the lower side of the
fuselage's root ribs and at the tail fin. See Figure 8.3.
Figure 8.3 - Jacking Point Locations
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 8 - 7
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.4.5 Road Transport

When transporting the airplane on the road, it is recommended that you use an
open trailer. All airplane components must be stored on a cushioned surface and
secured to avoid any movement during transport.
(a) Fuselage
The fuselage should be secured on the trailer standing on its wheels.
Ensure that the propeller has sufficient free space so it cannot be
damaged if the fuselage were to move.
(b) Wings
For transportation, both wings must be removed from the fuselage.
To avoid any damage, the wings are stored in upright position on the
leading edge with the root rib area positioned on an upholstered profiled
surface of at least 1 ft. 4 in. (400 mm) width. The outside wing area
(approximately 10 ft. (3 m) from the root rib area) is placed on an
upholstered profiled surface of a minimum of 12 in. (305 mm) width.
The wings must be secured against movement rearward or forward.
(c) Horizontal Stabilizer
The horizontal stabilizer is stored flat on the trailer and secured, or in an
upright position sitting on the leading edge on a profiled surface. All
supports must be upholstered with felt or foam rubber.
Page 8 - 8
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.5
CLEANING AND CARE

CAUTION
EXCESSIVE DIRT
PERFORMANCE.
DETERIORATES
THE
FLIGHT
8.5.1 Painted Surfaces
CAUTION
DO NOT USE ANY CLEANING AGENTS CONTAINING
SILICON BASED MATERIALS.
ONCE APPLIED,
SILICONE IS DIFFICULT TO REMOVE. SILICONE CAN
RESULT IN CONTAMINATED BONDING SURFACES IF
THE AIRCRAFT, EVER IN FUTURE, IS IN NEED OF
STRUCTURAL REPAIR.
To achieve the best flight characteristics for the DA20-C1, a clean external surface
is most important. For this reason it is highly recommended that the airplane,
especially the leading edge of the wings are kept clean at all times.
For best results, the cleaning is performed using a generous amount of water. If
necessary, a mild cleaning agent can be added. Excessive dirt such as insects etc.
are best cleaned off immediately after flight, because once dried they are difficult to
remove.
Approximately once a year, the surface of the airplane should be treated and buffed
using a silicon free automotive polish.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 8 - 9
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.5.2 Canopy
The DA20-C1 offers excellent vision through a large plexiglass canopy. It is
essential that care be taken while cleaning the canopy, as it is easily scratched. If
scratched, the vision will be reduced.
In principal the same rules should be applied to clean the canopy as for the outside
surface of the airplane. To remove excessive dirt, plenty of water should be used;
make sure to use only clean sponges and chamois. Even the smallest dust particle
can cause scratches.
In order to achieve clarity, plastic cleaners such as Permatex Part No. 403D or
Mirror Glaze may be used according to the manufacturers instructions. Do not
wipe in circles, but only in one direction.
8.5.3 Propeller
Refer to the Sensenich Propeller, W69EK7-63, W69EK7-63G and W69EK-63
Instruction Manual.
8.5.4 Engine
See Operator's Manual for the Continental IO 240B aircraft engine Form # X30620.
8.5.5 Interior Surfaces, Seats and Carpets
The interior should be cleaned using a vacuum cleaner. All loose items (pens, bags
etc.) should be properly stored and secured. All instruments must be cleaned using
a soft dry cloth. Plastic surfaces should be wiped clean using a damp cloth without
any cleaning agents.
Page 8 - 10
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
8.6
GROUND DE-ICING
Approved de-icing fluids are:
Manufacturer
Name
Kilfrost
TKS 80
Aeroshell
Compound 07
Any Source
AL-5 (DTD 406B)
Remove the snow from the aircraft as follows:

(a) Remove any snow from the airplane using a soft brush.
(b) Spray de-icing fluid onto ice-covered surfaces using a suitable spray bottle.
(c) Use a soft piece of cloth to wipe the airplane dry.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 8 - 11
Handling, Care and

Maintenance
Page 8 - 12
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplements
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
9.1
GENERAL ...........................................................................................9-3
9.2
INDEX OF SUPPLEMENTS................................................................9-4
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 9 - 1
Supplements
Page 9 - 2
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplements
9.1
GENERAL
This Chapter contains information regarding optional equipment which may be
installed in your airplane.
Individual supplements address each optional equipment installation.
It is only necessary to maintain those supplements which pertain to your specific
airplanes configuration.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page 9 - 3
Supplements
9.2
INDEX OF SUPPLEMENTS
NOTE
It is only necessary to maintain those supplements
which pertain to optional equipment that may be
installed in your airplane.
Supplement No.
Page 9 - 4
Title
Pages
External Power Operation
16
Winterization Kit
Recognition Lights
Gross Weight Increase (800 kg)

This Supplement has been incorporated
into the AFM and is no longer required.
N/A
S-Tec Autopilot
14
VM1000 Engine Instruments
10
Auxiliary Fuel System
10
Stick Mounted Trim Switches
20 US Gallon Fuel Tank
10
Reversed Instrument Panel
11
Pitot Heat Operation
12
Brazilian Placards and Markings
10
13
Garmin G500 Integrated Display System
26
14
French Placards and Markings
15
German Placards and Markings
14
16
Spanish Placards and Markings
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplements

Supplement No.
17
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Title
Chinese Placards and Markings
February 12, 2013
Pages
6
Page 9 - 5
Supplements
Page 9 - 6
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 1
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 1
EXTERNAL POWER OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ...........................................................................................S1-3
2.
OPERATING LIMITATIONS ................................................................S1-5
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES...........................................................S1-6
4.
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES.............................................S1-7
5.
PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................S1-16
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE .................................................................S1-16
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ...............S1-16
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ...S1-16
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
Page S1 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 1
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the operating procedure for a DA20-C1 aircraft
equipped with an optional External Power Unit (EPU). The EPU receptacle and
related circuits provide for the connection of an external power source for various
ground operations, e.g. maintenance, battery charging, starting.
CAUTION
OVER-VOLTAGE PROTECTION DOES NOT EXIST.
DO NOT CONNECT ANY POWER SOURCE OTHER
THAN 12 VOLT DC BATTERY OR 14 VOLT
(NOMINAL) DC GROUND POWER CART.
The circuit provides protection in the event that the external power source is
connected in reverse polarity. A switch in the cockpit to the left of the light switches
allows the EPU relay to close once the external power source is connected and
power is available. A light in the cockpit indicates that power is available at the
receptacle or that the EPU relay has remained closed following a disconnect (see
normal procedures).
On aircraft C0001 through C0148 and C0150 with an EPU installed, a relay bypass
circuit is provided to enable the battery relay to be closed if the battery has been
discharged so much that it does not have enough power to close the relay by itself.
Depending on the state of battery discharge, the battery relay may take several
minutes to close. This circuit is not installed on aircraft C0149 and C0151 onwards.
See Figure S1.1 for location and Figure S1.2 for a simplified schematic. EPU plug
Cole Hersee P/N 11042 is required to connect to the receptacle. This receptacle is
located in one of two locations. Aircraft serial numbers C0001 through C0148 and
C0150 have this receptacle located on the fuselage at the rear portion of the wing
root. Aircraft serial numbers C0149 and C0151 onwards have this receptacle
located on the fuselage in front of the left-hand wing root
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
.
Figure S1-1 - Location of External Power Receptacle
M
A
I
N
Battery Breaker
EPU Switch
Battery Switch
B
U
S
CANOPY
Reverse Polarity Diode
EPU Relay
Current Limiter
Reverse Current Diode
Circuit Breaker
EPU Receptacle
EPU Annunciator
EPU Plug
Battery Relay
Battery
Figure S1-2 - Simplified Schematic

Page S1 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
2.
Supplement 1
Voltage supplied to the EPU receptacle should be 12-14 volts nominal.
2.15
PLACARDS
(a) On the lower left side of the instrument panel above the switches.
(b) On the right side of the aircraft above the EPU receptacle.
EXTERNAL
POWER
14 VOLTS
(c) On the EPU/FUSE mounting bracket in the Relay box. (Aircraft S/N C001
through C0148 and C0150 only).
HOUR METER
EPU CHARGE
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
3.
3.3.4 Fire
(a) Engine Fire during Engine-Start-Up on the Ground (EPU power connected).
(1) Fuel Shut-off Valve...................................... CLOSED
(2) Cabin Heat.................................................. CLOSED
(3) Mixture ........................................................ IDLE CUTOFF
(4) Throttle........................................................ FULL
(5) GEN/BAT Master Switch............................. OFF
(6) Ignition Switch............................................. OFF
(7) EPU Switch................................................. OFF
(8) Evacuate Airplane immediately
Page S1 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1
GENERAL
Supplement 1
The following general procedure should be used to supply External Power to the
aircraft for purposes other than engine starting.
Power ON
(a) Connect external power source to the............... EPU light ON
EPU receptacle.
(b) EPU switch ....................................................... ON
(c) GEN/BAT Master Switch .................................. ON if desired for charging
(Battery only)
(d) Avionics Master Switch .................................... ON if desired
CAUTION
IF THE BATTERY HAS BEEN DISCHARGED, IT IS
ADVISABLE TO LEAVE THE BATTERY ON
CHARGE FOR A PERIOD OF TIME LONG ENOUGH
TO CHARGE THE BATTERY.
CONSULT
MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL IF THE STATE OF
CHARGE OF THE BATTERY IS IN QUESTION. DO
NOT FLY THE AIRCRAFT WITH THE BATTERY IN A
DISCHARGED STATE.
Power OFF
(a) Electrical loads ................................................. OFF
(b) Avionics Master Switch ..................................... OFF
(c) GEN/ BAT Master Switch .................................. OFF
(d) EPU switch ....................................................... OFF
(e) LIFT EPU receptacle cover, PULL ................... EPU light OFF
external power plug.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
4.4

In addition to those items contained in Section 4, Normal Operating Procedures,
Preflight Inspection, check the following items if this supplement is applicable to the
aircraft you are operating:
(a) In-Cabin Check
Caution Lights (EPU)........................ illuminated if EPU power available
Right Wing (C0001 to C0148, C0150)
Left Side of Fuselage (C0149, C0151 and Above)
EPU Receptacle .............................. check EPU connector inserted and
(For EPU START)
secure. Adequate power source
available.
EPU Receptacle .............................. check EPU power cord
(EPU not required for starting)
disconnected and power cart clear
of aircraft.
Page S1 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 1
Before Starting Engine

The Before Starting Engine checklist from Section 4.4.2 is repeated in this section and
includes the steps for starting the engine with an external power source connected.
(a) Preflight Inspection...................................... performed
(b) Pedals ......................................................... adjust, lock
(c) Passenger Briefing ...................................... performed
(d) Safety Belts ................................................. fasten
(e) Parking Brake.............................................. set
(f) Flight Controls ............................................. free
(g) Fuel Shut-off Valve...................................... OPEN
(h) Mixture......................................................... FULL RICH
(i) Throttle ........................................................ IDLE
(j) Friction Device of Throttle Quadrant ........... adjust
(k) Avionics Master Switch ............................... OFF
(l) EPU light ..................................................... check ON
(m) EPU Switch ................................................. ON
(n) Voltmeter ..................................................... check 12-14 volts
(o) GEN/BAT Master Switch ............................. ON
(p) Generator Warning Light ............................. illuminated
(q) Exterior Lights ............................................. as required
(r) Instrument Panel Lighting............................ as required
(s) Canopy ........................................................ close and secure
(t) Canopy Unlocking Warning Light ................ OFF
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
Starting Engine
The Starting Engine checklist from Section 4.4.3 is repeated in this section and includes
the steps for starting the engine with an external power source connected.
4.4.3 Starting Engine
(a) Starting Engine Cold
NOTE
It is recommended that the engine be preheated if it
has been cold soaked for 2 hours or more at
temperatures of -4 C (25 F) or less.
(1) Throttle........................................................ IDLE
(2) Mixture ........................................................ FULL RICH
(3) Toe Brakes.................................................. hold
(4) Propeller Area............................................. clear
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT PROPELLER AREA IS CLEAR!
CAUTION
DO NOT ENGAGE STARTER IF THE PROPELLER
IS MOVING. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE CAN
RESULT
NOTE
Steps (5), (6), (7), (8) and (9) are to be performed
without delay between steps.
NOTE
Colder ambient temperatures require longer priming.
Page S1 - 10
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 1
(5) Fuel Pump................................................... ON

(6) Fuel Prime................................................... ON
(7) Throttle........................................................ FULL for prime (prime for 3
seconds
minimum
before
starting)
(8) Throttle........................................................ Full IDLE to 1/4 inch OPEN as
required
(9) Ignition Switch............................................. START, hold until engine starts
or for 10 seconds maximum (if
engine does not start, release
ignition key, then push throttle
to full power for 3 seconds
minimum for more priming, then
repeat from Step (8))
NOTE
If the optional Push-to-Start ignition switch is installed,
then an additional PUSH action is required after the
ignition switch is turned to the START position when
implementing start.
(10)Starter Warning Light .................................. illuminated while ignition is in
START position
NOTE
(11)Throttle........................................................ 800 to 1000 RPM
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE ABOVE 1000 RPM
UNTIL AN OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATION IS
REGISTERED.
(12)Fuel Prime................................................... OFF
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 11
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
(13)Engine Instruments..................................... check
NOTE
Excessive priming can result in a flooded engine. To
clear a flooded engine, turn off fuel pump and fuel
prime, open throttle 1/2 - 1 inch and engage starter.
The engine should start for a short period and then
stop. Excess fuel has now been cleared and engine
start from item (1) can be performed.
.
CAUTION
IF OIL PRESSURE IS BELOW 10 PSI, SHUT DOWN
THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY (MAXIMUM 30
SECONDS DELAY).
NOTE
Oil Pressure may advance above the green arc until
the Oil Temp. reaches normal operating temperatures.
Regulate warm up RPM to maintain pressure below
100 psi limit. At ambient temperatures below 32 F
(0 C) DO NOT apply full power if oil pressure is above
70 psi.
(14)Starter Warning Light .................................. check OFF
Page S1 - 12
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 1
(b) Starting Engine Warm

(1) Throttle........................................................ IDLE
(2) Mixture ........................................................ FULL RICH
(3) Toe Brakes .................................................. hold
(4) Propeller Area ............................................. clear
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT PROPELLER AREA IS CLEAR!
CAUTION
DO NOT ENGAGE STARTER IF THE PROPELLER
IS MOVING. SERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE CAN
RESULT
NOTE
Steps (5), (6), (7), (8) and (9) are to be performed
without delay between steps.
(5) Fuel Pump................................................... ON
(6) Fuel Prime................................................... ON
(7) Throttle........................................................ FULL for prime, 1 to 3 seconds
before starting)
(8) Throttle........................................................ 1/2 - 1 inch OPEN (approx.)
(9) Ignition Switch............................................. START, hold until engine starts
or for 10 seconds maximum
(repeat from Step (7) if engine
does not start)
NOTE
If the optional Push-to-Start ignition switch is installed,
then an additional PUSH action is required after the
ignition switch is turned to the START position when
implementing start.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 13
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
(10)Starter Warning Light .................................. illuminated while ignition is in

START position
NOTE
Activate starter for a maximum of 30 seconds only,
(11)Throttle........................................................ 800 to 1000 RPM
(12)Fuel Prime .................................................. OFF
(13)Engine Instruments..................................... check
NOTE
Excessive priming can result in a flooded engine. To
clear a flooded engine, turn off the fuel pump and fuel
prime, open throttle 1/2 - 1 inch and engage starter.
The engine should start for a short period and then
stop. Excess fuel has now been cleared and engine
start from item (1) can be performed..
CAUTION
IF OIL PRESSURE IS BELOW 10 PSI, SHUT DOWN
THE ENGINE IMMEDIATELY (MAXIMUM 30
SECONDS DELAY).
NOTE
Oil Pressure may advance above the green arc until
the Oil Temp. reaches normal operating temperatures.
Regulate warm up RPM to maintain pressure below
100 psi limit. At ambient temperatures below 32 F
(0 C) DO NOT apply full power if oil pressure is above
70 psi.
Page S1 - 14
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 1
(c) After Engine has Started
CAUTION
IT IS DANGEROUS TO APPROACH AN AIRCRAFT
WITH ITS ENGINE OPERATING. ONLY GROUND
PERSONNEL
PROPERLY
TRAINED
ON
PROCEDURES FOR APPROACHING OPERATING
AIRCRAFT
SHOULD
BE
ALLOWED
TO
DISCONNECT EPU SOURCE.
PRACTICE THE
REMOVAL OF THE POWER CORD BEFORE
ATTEMPTING WITH ENGINE OPERATING. NEVER
APPROACH THE AIRCRAFT WITHOUT A SIGNAL
FROM THE PILOT. ENSURE THE AIRCRAFT IS
PARKED OVER AN AREA OF PAVEMENT WHERE
THERE IS A SURE FOOTING. PROTECT EYES AND
EARS WHEN NEAR THE OPERATING ENGINE.
(1) Select the EPU switch to OFF..................... EPU light ON
(2) Signal the ground crew to PULL the .......... EPU light OFF
EPU cord.
(3) Master Switch (GEN) .................................. OFF
(4) Battery Voltage............................................ check approx. 12 volts
(5) Master Switch (GEN) .................................. ON, check approx. 14 volts
(6) GEN warning light ...................................... check OFF
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S1 - 15
DOT Approved
Supplement 1
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance associated with EPU operations.
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE / EQUIPMENT LIST

Refer to the Equipment List, Chapter 6.5,
7.
Item Number 24-002 (Aircraft S/N C0001 through C0148 and C0150)
Item Number 24-005 (Aircraft S/N C0149 and C0151 onwards)
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS

There is no change in description of the airplane and its systems.
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTATIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

There is no change in handling, preventave or corrective maintenance.
Page S1 - 16
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 2
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 2
WINTERIZATION KIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S2-3
2.
OPERATING LIMITATIONS .....................................................................S2-3
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES................................................................S2-4
4.
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES..................................................S2-4
5.
PERFORMANCE .....................................................................................S2-4
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE.........................................................................S2-4
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ......................S2-5
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ..........S2-6
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S2 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 2
Page S2 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 2
GENERAL
The Winterization Kit consists of cowling inlet and outlet baffles. The inlet baffles are
attached to the upper cowling with two winged 1/4-turn fasteners. The outlet baffles
are attached to the lower cowling with screws. At take-off outside air temperatures
below 14F/-10C it is recommended to use both inlet and outlet baffles together. At
temperatures between 32F/0C and 54.5F/12.5C it is not permissible to use both
inlet and outlet baffles together. Either the inlet baffles only or the outlet baffles only
may be used in this temperature range.
At temperatures above 54F (12.5C) both inlet baffles and outlet baffles must be
removed. These temperature ranges have been established by test to prevent the
engine from overheating during a prolonged climb.
It is recommended to install the outlet baffles during periods when the take-off
temperatures are consistently below 32F/0C. The inlet baffles can be installed or
removed as required.
The installation is defined by Service Bulletin DAC1-71-03.
2.
Maximum T/O outside air temperature with either inlet or outlet baffles installed is
54F (12.5C).
Maximum T/O outside air temperature with both inlet and outlet baffles installed is
32F (0C).
The following placard must be installed on the cowling, immediately below the oil
filler door and on the removable baffles:
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S2 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 2
3.
There is no change to the airplane emergency procedures when the Winterization
Kit is installed.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES

Insert after Item (7) (c) of the Walk-around inspection (refer to section 4.4.1 of the
Airplane Flight Manual)]
Install or remove winter kit baffles according to the following chart:
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance when the Winterization Kit is installed.
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE

The effect of the Winterization Kit on weight and balance is negligible.
Page S2 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
7.
Supplement 2

The Winterization Kit consists of:
-
left and right baffles installed in the forward cowling inlets,
left and right baffles installed in the aft outlet opening of the lower
cowling, and
a placard located on the cowling below the oil door.
The baffles reduce the flow of cooling air through the cowling, thereby increasing
the operating temperature of the engine. At moderate temperatures either the inlet
or outlet baffles may be installed. At lower temperatures both inlet and outlet baffles
should be installed.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S2 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 2
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTATIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

The inlet baffles are removed by unfastening two 1/4-turn fasteners on each baffle.
The outlet baffles are removed by unscrewing 5 attaching screws from the lower
cowling. Store the screws and washers in the baffle rivnuts and store baffles in the
baggage compartment.
Page S2 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 3
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 3
RECOGNITION LIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S3-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE .....................................................................................S3-3
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S3 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 3
Page S3 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 3
GENERAL
The installation is defined by Service Bulletin DAC1-33-01.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS
(a) On the instrument panel above the individual circuit breakers.
Figure S3-1 - Breakers Identification
3.
There are no changes to the airplane emergency procedures when the Recognition
Lights are installed.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Pulsing the landing/taxi lights enhances the aircraft flight path recognition quality
and may be used any time the pilot desires. It is recommended that the landing
lights be turned on steady rate when the aircraft is within 200' AGL at night.
NOTE
Pulsing should not be used when operating near
clouds or on the ground.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance with the Recognition Lights installed.
6.

The Recognition Lights installation adds 2.5 lbs (1.13 kg) of weight at a 0 in (0 m)
moment arm.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S3 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 3
7.

The Recognition Light System consists of 3, 35 watt lamps located in the left wing
and the landing light. The lamps are aimed specifically to increase the aircraft's
visibility on final approach and head on. One of the lamps is aimed to perform the
function of the original taxi light. The 3 lamps and the original landing light are
connected to a Pulselite power supply which allows one or more of the lights to be
pulsed at approximately 46 times per minute. The instrument panel modifications
include a Pulse Switch on the left side of the Lights switch panel and a Pulse
System circuit breaker on the right side of the Lights panel (see Figure S3-2).
Figure S3-2 - Instrument Panel Modifications
With the Taxi and Landing switches in the OFF position, selecting the Pulse switch
to ON causes the three lamps and the landing light to pulse simultaneously.
Selecting either the Taxi light or the Landing light to ON while the Pulse switch is in
the ON position causes the corresponding lamp(s) to remain on steady. With the
Pulse switch in the off position the Taxi light and Landing light function as normal
light circuits.
Page S3 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
8.
Supplement 3
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

Service or replacement of bulbs shall be performed according to chapter 33-00 of
your Diamond Aircraft Maintenance Manual (Document number DA201-C1).
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S3 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 3
Page S3 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 4
GROSS WEIGHT INCREASE (800 KG)
Supplement 4 has been REMOVED - Pages S4-1 thru S4-16

The Supplement (Gross Weight Increase to 800 kg) has
been incorporated into Revision 26 of the AFM and the
Supplement is no longer required.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Supplement 4
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 5
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 5
S-TEC AUTOPILOT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S5-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................S5-10
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE.......................................................................S5-10
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS .................... S5-11
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ........S5-14
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
Page S5 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 5
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the optional installation of an S-TEC System 30
autopilot (Mod No. 30). Only the portions of the flight manual affected by this
installation are included in this supplement.
2.
NOTE
Refer to all of the Operating Limitations with the
following inserted into the appropriate place.
1. Autopilot operation is prohibited for airspeeds
greater than 148 KIAS.
2. Autopilot operation is prohibited during Takeoff and
Landing.
3. Maximum flap extension is T/O (15 Degrees) with
the Autopilot operating.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
2.15
PLACARDS
(a) Forward of the switch on the outboard side of the control stick.
ALT
ENG/DISENG
(b) Forward of the switch on the outboard side of the control stick.
AP DISC
(c) On the switch panel on the lower left side of the instrument panel. The placard
is customized to the installation and may not exactly as shown.
(d) Around the Mode Select / Disconnect Switch switch of the autopilot.
(e) On the instrument panel near the autopilot.
AUTOPILOT MAX. OPERATING SPEED 148 KIAS.

A/P OPS PROHIBITED FOR T/O & LDG.
MAX FLAP T/O (15 ) WITH A/P ON.
Page S5 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 5
3.
3.1
AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION
CAUTION
IN THE EVENT OF AN AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION,
OR ANY TIME THE AUTOPILOT IS NOT
PERFORMING AS EXPECTED OR COMMANDED,
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO IDENTIFY THE SYSTEM
PROBLEM.
IMMEDIATELY REGAIN CONTROL OF THE
AIRCRAFT BY OVERPOWERING THE AUTOPILOT
AS NECESSARY AND THEN DISCONNECT THE
AUTOPILOT.
DO NOT REENGAGE THE AUTOPILOT UNTIL THE
PROBLEM
HAS
BEEN
IDENTIFIED
AND
CORRECTED.
(a) Autopilot may be disconnected by:
(1) Depressing the "AP Disconnect" Switch on the right side of the pilot's
control grip.
(2) Pressing and holding the mode selector knob for approximately 2 seconds.
(3) Moving the autopilot master switch to "OFF" position.
(4) Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker.
(b) Altitude loss during a malfunction and recovery.
(1) The following altitude losses and bank angles were recorded after a
malfunction with a 3 second recovery delay:
Configuration......................................... Bank Angle/Altitude Loss
Climb / Descent / Cruise ....................... 55 Degrees/ -200'
(2) The following altitude losses and bank angles were recorded after a
malfunction with a 1 second recovery delay:
Configuration......................................... Bank Angle/Altitude Loss
Maneuvering ......................................... 20 Degrees/ -20'
Approach (coupled or uncoupled)......... 15 Degrees/ -20'
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
Refer to all of the Normal Operating Procedures with
the following inserted into the appropriate places.
4.4

(2) Left Wing
(J) Autopilot Static Port ..................................check clear
Page S5 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 5

(b) 1. AP Master Switch ......................................... ON (if desired)
(b) 2. Autopilot Mandatory Pre-flight Test .............. COMPLETE
Autopilot Mandatory Pre-flight Test
(a) Observe all lights and annunciators illuminate.
(b) Observe the following light sequence of the trim indicators:
(Sequence requires 9 seconds).
(1) Initially both trim UP and DN lights are illuminated.
(2) UP light extinguishes and remains off.
(3) DN light then extinguishes and remains off.
(4) All lights extinguish except for "RDY" light.
The autopilot can be engaged and disengaged repeatedly using the mode selector
knob. The autopilot can be disengaged using the A/P disconnect switch. Once the
A/P master is switched off, the test must be conducted again to get a ready
indication. If the ready light does not illuminate after the test, a failure to pass the
test is indicated and the system will require service.
Altitude mode cannot be engaged unless power is on for more than 15 seconds.
System Functional Test:
(1) Push Mode Switch STB Annunciator illuminates. Rotate Mode Select
knob left and right. Observe control stick moves in corresponding direction.
Centre turn knob.
(2) Set D.G. and place heading bug under lubber line (if installed). Push Mode
Select knob to engage HDG mode. Observe HDG annunciator. Move
HDG bug left and right. Observe proper control stick motion.
(3) Overpower test Grasp control stick and overpower roll servo left and right.
Overpower action should be smooth with no noise or jerky feel. If unusual
sound or excessive play is detected, have the servo installation inspected
prior to flight.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
(4) Radio Check
(A) Turn on NAV Radio, with valid NAV signal, engage LO TRK mode and
move VOR OBS so that VOR needle moves left and right control stick
should follow the direction of needle movement.
(B) Select Hi TRK mode the control stick should again follow radio needle
movement and with more authority than produced by Lo TRK mode.
(5) Move control stick to level flight position Engage ALT mode. Move control
stick fore and aft to overpower pitch servo clutch. Overpower action should
be smooth with no noise or jerky feel. If unusual sound or excessive play is
detected, have the servo installation inspected prior to flight.
(6) Trim Check Manually apply back pressure to control stick for 2-3 seconds.
Observe the DN trim light illumination and the alert tone is heard. Apply
forward pressure to the control stick for 2-3 seconds, observe the UP trim
light illumination and the alert tone is heard. Move the control stick to
centre. Observe both UP/DN lights extinguish.
(7) Hold control stick and push mode knob for 2 seconds or press the AP
DISC on the control stick. Note that roll and pitch servos release. Move
control stick to confirm roll and pitch motions are free, with no control
restriction or binding.
Page S5 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 5
4.4.6 Before Take-off

(w) 1. Autopilot ....................................................... Disengaged (AP DISC)
4.4.9 Cruise
(g) Autopilot Operation (if desired)
NOTE
A guide containing useful operating information is
available from S-TEC Corporation, One S-TEC Way,
Municipal Airport, Mineral Wells, Texas, 76067-9236,
USA. The Guide, P/N 8777, is titled Pilots Operating
Handbook, System Twenty, System Thirty, System
Thirty ALT, Autopilots
ROLL MODE
(a) Check Autopilot Master .................................... ON
(b) Mode Select Switch .......................................... Select desired roll mode
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE
(a) Check Autopilot Master .................................... ON
NOTE
The aircraft should be trimmed for level flight prior to
Altitude Hold Engagement.
(b) ALT ENG / DISENG ......................................... PRESS
(c) Trim UP, trim DN annunciators .................... MONITOR
4.4.11 Landing Approach

(a) Autopilot ........................................................... Disengaged (AP DISC)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance with the autopilot system installed.
6.

The installation adds 11.1 lbs (5.0 kg) of weight at a 24.6 in (.62 m) arm.
Page S5 - 10
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 5
7.
7.15
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The System 30 is a pure rate autopilot which uses an inclined rate gyro in the Turn
Coordinator instrument as the primary roll and turn rate sensor and an
accelerometer and an absolute pressure transducer as pitch rate sensors. The turn
coordinator includes an autopilot pick-off, a gyro RPM detector and an instrument
power monitor. Low electrical power will cause the instrument "flag" to appear while
low RPM will cause the autopilot to disconnect. The autopilot includes an automatic
pre-flight test feature that allows a visual check of all the annunciator lamps and
checks critical elements of the accelerometer system. The test feature will not
enable autopilot function unless the automatic test sequence is satisfactorily
completed.
When the pre-flight test is satisfactorily completed and when the rate gyro RPM is
correct, the green "RDY" light will illuminate indicating the autopilot is ready for the
functional check and operation. The autopilot cannot be engaged unless the "RDY"
light is illuminated.
A Directional Gyro (DG) or compass system supplies heading information to the
autopilot by a heading bug in the instrument.
Pitch axis control is provided for the altitude hold function by use of the
accelerometer and the pressure transducer. When the altitude hold mode is
engaged an elevator trim sensor in the pitch servo will detect the elevator trim
condition. When elevator trim is necessary to re-establish a trimmed condition, trim
indicator lights on the Turn Coordinator will illuminate to indicate the direction to trim
to restore a trimmed condition. In addition to the indicator lights an audible tone will
sound.
If the pilot ignores a trim light for more than five seconds, the light will begin to flash
to get the pilot's attention.
The indicator and annunciator lamp brilliance is controlled through the aircraft
instrument light rheostat, except for the "trim" indicators, which always illuminate at
full intensity.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 11
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
The following list describes the various features illustrated in Figure S5-1.
(1)
Turn Coordinator Provides basic flight information, autopilot mode switching

and annunciation.
(2) Mode Annunciation window displays mode in use.

(3) Green Ready (RDY) Light Illuminates when autopilot is ready for
engagement. When autopilot is disconnected, "RDY" will flash for five seconds
accompanied by a beeping audio tone.
(4) Mode Select/Disconnect Switch Each momentary push of this knob will select
an autopilot mode, left to right, beginning with ST (Stabilizer) mode and ending
with (Hi) TRK mode. Holding the knob in for more than 2 seconds will
disconnect the autopilot. Turning the knob left or right in the stabilizer mode will
provide left/right commands to the autopilot proportional to knob displacement
up to a standard rate turn.
(5) Altitude Hold Engage/Disengage Switch This control stick mounted switch
will engage or disengage the Altitude Hold Mode as desired. The blue (ALT)
light on the annunciator panel will illuminate when ALT. mode is engaged.
(6) Heading Mode If the system is equipped with a D.G., this mode will permit
preselected left/right turns using the D.G. heading bug.
(7) TRK (Track) using the (Lo) mode of the tracking feature will provide low
system gain for comfortable cross country tracking of VOR or GPS signals.
Using the (Hi) mode of the tracking feature will provide a higher level of system
gain for more active tracking of VOR, GPS or Localizer front course signals.
(8) Trim UP Light Illuminates to indicate the need for nose UP trim.
(9) Trim DOWN Light Illuminates to indicate the need for nose DOWN trim.
When both lights are out, the aircraft is in trim longitudinally.
(10) Blue (ALT) light illuminates when altitude mode is engaged.
(11) Flag Window Red flag visible indicates lack of electrical power to primary turn
coordinator unit.
(12) Autopilot Master ON-OFF Switch Refer to pre-flight procedures for operating
details.
(13) Remote AP disconnect switch.
(14) GPSS Heading Switch / Annunciator. Works in conjunction with HDG mode.
When the GPSS is activated the GPSS converter changes ARINC 429 steering
data received from the GPS to heading signals.
Page S5 - 12
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 5
Figure S5-1 - Various Features of the System 30 Autopilot

DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S5 - 13
DOT Approved
Supplement 5
8.

There is no change in handling, preventative or corrective maintenance with the
installation of S-TEC System 30 autopilot (Mod No. 30).
Page S5 - 14
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 6
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 6
VM1000 MONITORING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S6-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE .....................................................................................S6-6
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S6 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 6
Page S6 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 6
1.
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the optional installation of the Vision Microsystems
VM1000 engine instrument package (Mod 31). Only portions of the flight manual
affected by the installation are included in this supplement.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS
(a) Under the buttons of the VM 1000 main display.
Figure S6-1 - Placard below the VM 1000 Main Display
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S6 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 6
3.
3.3
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES CHECKLIST
3.3.1 Engine Failures

(a) VM 1000 and EC 100 Display Malfunction
(1) Instrument Circuit Breaker ........................ PRESS IN or PULL and RESET
NOTE
If indication cannot be restored take care not to shock
cool the engine during a descent. Electrical system
voltage can be monitored on M803 Clock / OAT / Volt
Meter if installed.
(2) Airspeed .................................................... Do not exceed 115 KIAS
(3) If indication cannot be restored ................. Land at suitable airport
3.3.8 Electrical Power Failure
(b) Generator Failure
GEN. ANNUNCIATOR ILLUMINATED
(1) GEN/BAT Master Switch ........................... Cycle Generator Master Switch
OFF - ON
(2) Generator Circuit Breaker .......................... If tripped, reset
(3) Generator CONTROL Circuit Breaker ....... If tripped, reset
(4) If Generator can not be brought on-line ..... Switch OFF all non-flight
essential electrical consumers.
Monitor
Ammeter
and
Voltmeter. Land at nearest
suitable airport.
NOTE
There is 30 minutes of battery power at a discharge
load of 20 amperes when the battery is fully charged
and properly maintained. The amp meter monitors
generator load which will indicate low amps when the
generator is off or has malfunctioned.
Page S6 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 6

(c) Low Voltage Indication (needle in yellow Arc)
LOW VOLTAGE INDICATION (NEEDLE IN YELLOW ARC) WHILE AIRPLANE

IS ON THE GROUND
(1) Engine RPM ............................................... Increase RPM until needle is in
the Green Arc. This should
occur before exceeding 1100
RPM.
(2) Non-flight essential electrical consumers.... Switch OFF consumers until
needle is in the Green Arc.
(3) If needle remains in the yellow arc ..............Discontinue any planned flight
activity
left of center (discharge).
LOW VOLTAGE INDICATION (NEEDLE IN YELLOW ARC) DURING FLIGHT
(1) All non-flight essential electrical.................. Switch OFF
consumers
(2) If needle is remaining in the yellow arc.......Generator Failure
Refer to paragraph 3.3.8.C.
left of center (Discharge).
LOW VOLTAGE INDICATION (NEEDLE IN YELLOW ARC) DURING LANDING
(1) After landing ............................................... proceed in accordance with
paragraph 3.3.8.C.
WARNING
IF AT ANY TIME THE VOLTMETER NEEDLE INDICATES
IN THE RED ARC, THE PILOT SHOULD LAND AT THE
NEAREST SUITABLE AIRPORT AND SERVICE THE
AIRCRAFT ACCORDINGLY BEFORE CONTINUING THE
FLIGHT.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S6 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 6
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
There is no change in the normal procedures with the
VM 1000 and EC 100 monitoring system installed.
Although there are no necessary changes to the
normal procedures, Section 7 contains a description of
some of the operating modes and functions that may
be used, if desired by the pilot, as enhancements to the
normal procedures.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance with the VM1000 installed.
6.

The installation adds 3.13 lbs (1.37 kg) of weight at a 34.3 in (-0.88 m) moment
arm with the EC 100 option installed and the standard aircraft instruments removed.
The installation adds 2.44 lbs (1.06 kg) of weight at a 39.4 in (-1.01 m) moment
arm without the EC 100 option installed and the standard aircraft instruments
removed.
Page S6 - 6
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 6
7.
7.1
VM 1000 System General

The following provides a general description for use of the VM 1000 as it pertains to
the operation of the DA20-C1. Features such as Autotrack Lean Mode and EC
100 are described in detail in the VISON MICRO SYSTEM owners manual P/N
5010002. Copies of the manual can be obtained through.
Vision Micro Systems Inc.
4071 Hannegan Suite T
Bellingham, Washington 98226
Phone (360) 714-8203 Fax (360) 714-8253
7.2
Tachometer
The tachometer system provides an analog display and a four place digital display.
Color range marks provide a quick reference to monitor normal, and red line engine
RPM.
RPM: The digital display resolution is 10 RPM.
Engine Hours: When the engine is off, the digital display shows the total
accumulated engine hours to a maximum of 5999.9 hours. Engine hours are
accumulated any time RPM is greater than 1500.
A warning alert activates when the RPM redline is reached. The VM 1000 display
will flash, if installed, the EC100 displays the warning and an audible tone is heard.
7.3
Manifold Pressure
The manifold pressure system provides an analog display and a three place digital
display. The full sweep analog display resolution is 1" Hg. The digital display
resolution is 0.1" Hg.
A warning alert activates when the manifold pressure redline is reached. The VM
1000 display will flash, if installed, the EC100 displays the warning and an audible
tone is heard.
7.4
Oil System
Oil temperature and oil pressure are displayed continuously on an analog and a
digital display.
Oil Pressure: As oil pressure rises, the analog display increases proportionately.
The digital display reads in increments of 1 PSI. A warning alert activates whenever
the oil pressure redline is reached. The VM 1000 display will flash, if installed, the
EC100 displays the warning and an audible tone is heard.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S6 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 6
Oil Temperature:
As oil temperature rises, the analog display increases
proportionately. The digital display reads in increments of 1 degree Fahrenheit to a
maximum of 300 degrees. A warning alert activates whenever the oil temperature
rises above the redline. The VM 1000 display will flash, if installed, the EC100
displays the warning and an audible tone is heard.
7.5
Fuel Pressure
Fuel Pressure: As fuel pressure rises, the analog display increases proportionately.
The digital display reads in increments of 1 PSI. A warning alert activates whenever
the fuel pressure redline is reached. The VM 1000 display will flash, if installed, the
EC100 displays the warning and an audible tone is heard.
7.6
Fuel Computer System

The fuel computer portion of the VM 1000 is not operational on the DA20-C1.
7.7
Electrical System
Voltage is displayed both analog and digitally. Full color range marks provide a
quick reference for fast analysis of voltage levels. As voltage rises, the analog
display increases proportionally. The digital readout is at 0.1 volt resolution. A
warning alert activates whenever the voltage redline is reached. The VM 1000
display will flash, if installed, the EC100 displays the warning and an audible tone is
heard.
Amperage is displayed both analog and digitally. The load being monitored is the
electrical current the generator is supplying to the system. When the electrical load
is increased by turning on equipment, the ammeter will show an increase. When
the load being supplied by the generator drops below approximately 2 amps the VM
1000 display will flash, if installed, the EC100 displays the warning and an audible
tone is heard.
7.8
Fuel Quantity
Fuel quantity is displayed on a separate indicator but is controlled by the VM 1000
Data Processing Unit and EC 100 remote display. Display resolution is 1 US gallon.
When 5 US gallons remain in the main tank the fuel system display is flashed an
audible tone is heard and the EC 100 displays the warning.
Page S6 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 6
Figure S6-2 - Fuel Quantity
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S6 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 6
8.

Service and maintenance of the VM 1000 / EC 100 system shall be performed
according to the Aircraft Maintenance Manual (Document number DA201-C1).
Page S6 - 10
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 7
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 7
AUXILIARY FUEL SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S7-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE .....................................................................................S7-6
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S7 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 7
Page S7 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 7
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the optional installation of an auxiliary fuel tank system
(Mod No 60). The optional auxiliary fuel system installation provides extended
range operation by increasing the total fuel capacity of the DA20-C1 by 5 US
gallons.
Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included in this
supplement.
2.
NOTE
Refer to all of the Operating Limitations with the
following inserted into the appropriate place.
Initiate fuel transfer only when the main tank is less
than 3/4 full.
2.15
PLACARDS
(a) On the lower right corner of the instrument panel.
(b) Above the auxiliary fuel filter cap on the R/H side of the fuselage.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S7 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 7
(c) Above the auxiliary fuel filter cap on the R/H side of the fuselage.
(d) On the face of the auxiliary fuel tank gauge.
(e) On the underside of the fuselage, to the right, just forward of the wing trailing
edge.
3.
Emergency procedures are not affected by the Auxiliary Fuel Tank system.
Page S7 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
4.
Supplement 7
NORMAL PROCEDURES
NOTE
Refer to all of the Normal Operating Procedures with
the following inserted into the appropriate places.
CAUTION
THE AIRCRAFT MUST BE GROUNDED PRIOR TO
AND DURING FUELING. USE THE GROUND STUD,
LOCATED UNDER THE TRAILING EDGE OF THE
LEFT WING.
NOTE
It is recommended to fill the main tank first and to full
capacity before filling the auxiliary tank.
When using the auxiliary fuel tank, it is recommended
to fill the tank to full capacity.
4.4

(a) In-Cabin Check
Insert after Item (9).
(9)a. Fuel Transfer .................................. check OFF
Insert after Item (3)(F)
If using auxiliary tank:
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Vent ........................... check clear
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Drain.......................... drain water
Auxiliary Fuel Tank Quantity..................... check Full
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S7 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 7

Insert after Item (k).
(k)(1 Fuel Transfer .......................................... check OFF
4.4.6 Before Take-off (Engine Run-up)
Insert after Item (g).
(g)(1 Auxiliary Fuel Tank Indicator .................. check
4.4.18 Auxiliary Tank Fuel Transfer
NOTE
It is recommended to transfer fuel in level cruise flight.
(a) Main fuel tank.................................................... less than 3/4 full
(b) Auxiliary fuel tank indicator ............................... Full
(c) Fuel Transfer switch .......................................... ON
(d) Transfer time ..................................................... 10 minutes
(e) Auxiliary fuel tank indicator ............................... Empty
(f) Main fuel tank.................................................... 1/5 capacity increase
(g) Fuel Transfer switch .......................................... OFF
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance with the Auxiliary Fuel Tank system
installed.
Page S7 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
6.
Supplement 7

The installation (including unusable fuel) adds 10.6 lbs (4.8 kg) of weight at 32.4 in
(0.823 m) moment arm.
Figure S7-1 - Auxiliary Fuel Moment Chart
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S7 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 7
7.

The auxiliary fuel tank is located in the fuselage, aft of the passenger compartment
and underneath the baggage compartment floor, on the right hand side of the main
fuel tank.
Fuel is gravity fed from the auxiliary tank to the electric transfer pump, which is used
to pump fuel from the auxiliary fuel tank to the main fuel tank. From the pump, fuel
flows through a check valve and into the top of the main fuel tank. The check valve
is installed between the auxiliary tank and the main tank to prevent siphoning of fuel
from the main tank back into the auxiliary tank. The only ports in the auxiliary fuel
system are the auxiliary tank outlet and drain. All auxiliary fuel system components
are grounded to each other and the external ground stud, located under the trailing
edge of the left wing.
Figure S7-2 - Fuel System Schematic
Page S7 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
8.
Supplement 7

Service and maintenance of the Auxiliary Fuel Tank system shall be performed
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S7 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 7
Page S7 - 10
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 8
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 8
STICK MOUNTED TRIM SWITCHES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S8-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE .....................................................................................S8-3
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S8 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 8
Page S8 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 8
1.
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the optional installation of a stick mounted trim switch
system. Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included in
this supplement.
2.
There is no change to the operating limitations with the stick mounted trim switch
installed.
3.
There is no change to the emergency procedures with the stick mounted trim switch
installed.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change to the normal procedures with the stick mounted trim switch
installed.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance with the trim switch installed.
6.

The change in weight and balance is negligible with the installation of the stick
mounted trim switches.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S8 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 8
7.

Trim Switches are located on top of each Control Stick, aft of centre. The switches
are positioned so that they can be easily operated by thumb. Forward movement of
either switch gives nose down trimming and aft movement of the switch gives nose
up trim. The trim switches control electrical relays that supply electrical power to the
electric pitch trim motor. If the switches are operated in opposing directions at the
same time, the trim motor will not operate. Operation of the trim switches in the
same direction and at the same time will cause the trim motor to operate in that
direction.
Figure S8-1 - Control Stick Grip (Left Hand Shown)
8.

Service and maintenance of the Stick Mounted Trim Switches shall be performed
Page S8 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 9
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 9
20 US GALLON FUEL TANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ................................................................................................S9-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE .....................................................................................S9-4
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S9 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 9
Page S9 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 9
1.
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the optional installation of a smaller 20.5 US gallon fuel
tank in place of the standard 24.5 US gallon fuel tank. Only portions of the flight
manual affected by the installation are included in this supplement.
2.
2.14
FUEL
Fuel Capacity:
Total Fuel Quantity ..........................................:20.5 US gal. (78.0 liters)
Usable Fuel .....................................................:20.0 US gal. (76.0 liters)
Unusable Fuel .................................................:0.5 US gal. (2.0 liters)2.15
2.15
PLACARDS
6.
On the fuel quantity indicator.
26. Next to the fuel filler cap.
3.
There is no change to the emergency procedures.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S9 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 9
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change to the normal procedures.
5.
PERFORMANCE
The range with 30 minute reserve fuel is reduced by approximately 19% with the
20.5 US gallon fuel tank installed in place of the 24.5 US gallon tank.
6.

Lever arm of fuel in the 20.5 US gallon tank: 30.08 in (0.764 m)
7.
7.10
FUEL SYSTEM
A 20.5 US Gal total / 20.5 US Gal usable fuel tank replaces the standard 24.5 US
Gal total / 24.0 US Gal usable fuel tank. There are no other changes to the fuel
system.
7.10.5 Fuel Dipstick

A fuel dipstick P/N 22-2550-18-00, is supplied with all aircraft with the 20 US gallon
fuel tank installed. This dipstick permits direct measurement of the fuel level during
the pre-flight check.
8.

There is no change in handling, preventative or corrective maintenance with the
20 US gallon fuel tank installed.
Page S9 - 4
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 10
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 10
REVERSED INSTRUMENT PANEL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S10-3
2.
OPERATING LIMITATIONS ...................................................................S10-3
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES..............................................................S10-3
4.
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES................................................S10-3
5.
PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................S10-3
6.
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ....................S10-4
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S10 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 10
Page S10 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 10
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the optional installation of the navigation and
powerplant instruments in a reversed configuration. The navigational instruments
are located on the right hand side of the instrument panel. The powerplant
instruments are located on the left hand side of the panel. Only portions of the flight
manual affected by this installation are included in this supplement.
2.
There is no change in the operating limitations.
3.
The ELT and Placard are located on the left side of the aircraft.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change in the normal procedures.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane.
6.

The weight and balance of the airplane is not affected.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S10 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 10
7.
7.4
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel Components

Item
Description
Item
--
13
Clock/OAT
Item
Description
Item
Vertical Speed Ind.
25
--
37
Fuel Quantity Ind.
14
CDI
26
--
38
EGT Indicator
Magnetic Compass
15
Air Vent
27
--
39
CHT Indicator
Trim Position Display
16
Switch Panel
28
--
40
Circuit Breakers
Annunciator Lights
17
Ignition/Start Sw.
29
Marker/Audio Panel
41
Nav/Comm/GPS
Airspeed Indicator
18
Master Sw. Panel
30
--
42
Comm
Artificial Horizon Ind,
19
Flap Control
31
Hour Meter
43
Transponder
Altimeter
20
--
32
Ammeter
44
Fuel Prime Switch
Tachometer
21
--
33
Voltmeter
45
ELT Remote Switch
10
Stall Warning Horn
22
--
34
Oil Temp. Ind.
--
11
Turn Coordinator
23
--
35
Oil Pressure Ind.
--
12
Directional Gyro
24
--
36
Fuel Pressure Ind.
--
8.
Description
Description

There is no change in handling, preventative or corrective maintenance with this
instrument panel configuration.
Page S10 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 11
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 11
PITOT HEAT OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL .............................................................................................. S11-3
2.
OPERATING LIMITATIONS ................................................................... S11-4
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES.............................................................. S11-5
4.
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES................................................ S11-5
5.
PERFORMANCE ................................................................................... S11-7
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE....................................................................... S11-7
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS .................... S11-7
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ........ S11-7
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S11 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 11
Page S11 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 11
GENERAL
Ice build up on the Pitot Static Probe can cause the airspeed, altimeter and vertical
speed indicators to display incorrect data. The Pitot Heat system provides
protection against ice build up on the Pitot Static Probe.
Due to the increased electrical load when the Pitot Heat system is operating, the
ammeter must be monitored. When engine power settings are below cruise power
and/or combinations of electrical system users result in a higher than normal power
consumption, it may be necessary to manage the electrical load by, turning off
unnecessary electrical consumers.
CAUTION
CHECKING OPERATION BY TOUCHING THE
PROBE AFTER MOMENTARY APPLICATION OF
POWER IS NOT SUFFICIENT IN DETERMINING
PROPER SYSTEM OPERATION.
THE GREEN
PITOT CURRENT MONITOR LIGHT MUST
ILLUMINATE DURING THE TEST TO CONFIRM
PROPER HEATING.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S11 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 11
2.
2.15
PLACARDS
(a) On the lower left side of the instrument panel above the switches.
1.
or
2.
or
3.
or
4.
Page S11 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.
Supplement 11
Icing: Unintentional Flight into Icing Area Checklist has been repeated in this
section to include operations with pitot heat system installed.
3.3.5 Icing
Unintentional Flight Into Icing Area
(a) Pitot Heat.............................................................ON
(b) Leave icing area (through change of altitude or change of flight direction to
reach area with higher outside air temp).
(c) Continue to move control surfaces to maintain their moveability.
(d) Alternate Air ........................................................ON
(e) Increase RPM to avoid icing of propeller blades (observe maximum RPM).
(f) Cabin Heat .........................................................ON DEFROST
CAUTION
WING, THE STALL SPEED WILL INCREASE.
CAUTION
IN CASE OF ICING ON WING LEADING EDGE,
ERRONEOUS INDICATING OF THE AIRSPEED,
ALTIMETER, RATE OF CLIMB AND STALL WARNING
SHOULD BE EXPECTED.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.4
4.4.0 General
The Pitot Heat system should be operated where meteorological conditions
warrant its use and where government regulations require its operation.
As part of 4.4.1. Preflight Inspection: Walk Around, check the pitot probe insulating
spacer for signs of charring near the pitot probe. If signs of overheating are present
maintenance action will be required prior to flight.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S11 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 11
(a) Avionics Master Switch .................................... ON
(b) Flight Instruments and Avionics ....................... set
(c) Engine Gauges ................................................ check
(d) Voltmeter .......................................................... check, ensure needle is in the

green arc. Increase RPM to
achieve or turn OFF non-flight
essential electrical consumers
(e) Warning Lights, Gen, Canopy, Start, ................ push to test
EPU (if installed)
(f) Fuel Prime ........................................................ Check OFF
(g) Fuel Pump ........................................................ Check ON
(h) Pitot Heat Switch............................................... ON
(i) Pitot Heat Monitor Light..................................... ON, operational and dimmable
(j) Pitot Heat Switch ............................................... OFF
(k) Parking Brake ................................................... release
NOTE
The ground test of the pitot heat should be kept to the
minimum length of time required to verify normal
operation (max. 10 seconds). Operation of the pitot
heat system on the ground is unnecessary and will
shorten the life of the heaters.
CAUTION
WARM-UP ENGINE TO A MINIMUM OIL TEMPERATURE
OF 75 F AT 1000 TO 1200 RPM (ALSO POSSIBLE
DURING TAXI). DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE ABOVE 1000
RPM UNTIL AN OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATION IS
REGISTERED.
Page S11 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
5.
Supplement 11
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in airplane performance associated with pitot heat operation.
6.

The weight and balance of the aircraft is not affected by pitot heat operation.
7.
7.12.1 Pitot Heat

The Pitot Heat system consists of heating elements imbedded in the Pitot Static
Probe, a 15 amp circuit breaker, a control relay, thermal limit switches (HIGH and
LOW), OFF/ON switch, and a GREEN LED monitor. The control relay closes and
supplies electrical current to the Pitot Static Probe heaters when the PITOT
SWITCH is set to ON and the LOW thermal limit switch is CLOSED. A current
monitoring sensor confirms this by activating the GREEN LED monitor light.
The LOW thermal limit switch with automatic reset will cycle the control relay if the
system is ON and an overheat condition exists. If the LOW temperature limit switch
activates it will inhibit Pitot Static Probe heater operation and the GREEN LED
monitor will go OFF until the Pitot Static Probe temperature drops below
approximately 50 degrees Celsius.
8.

To prevent premature failure of the heating elements the ground test of the pitot
heat should be kept to the minimum length of time required to verify normal
operation (max. 10 seconds). Operation of the pitot heat system on the ground is
unnecessary and will shorten the life of the heaters.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S11 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 11
Page S11 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 12
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 12
BRAZILIAN PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S12-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................S12-9
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S12 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 12
Page S12 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 12
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the placards and markings for the Brazilian airplane.
Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included in this
supplement.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS.
(a) On the exterior of the canopy frame on the L/H side (If equipped with an outside
handle).
(b) On the exterior of the canopy frame on the R/H side (If equipped with an outside
handle).
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S12 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 12
(c) On the interior of the canopy frame on the L/H side (If equipped with an outside
handle).
(d) On the interior of the canopy frame on the R/H side (If equipped with an outside
handle).
(e) On the exterior of the canopy frame on the L/H side (If equipped with a lock).
Page S12 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 12
(f) On the L/H side of the canopy sill.
(g) On the R/H side of the canopy sill.
(h) On the R/H upper fuselage behind the canopy, if an ELT is installed.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S12 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 12
(i) Next to the fuel filler cap.
(j) Next to the fuel filler cap.
(k) On the inside of the oil filler door.
(l) On the upper L/H fuselage near the wing trailer edge.
Page S12 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 12
(m) Under each wing and on the tail skid.
(n) On the underside of the fuselage (belly) near the L/H wing trailing edge.
(o) On the upper engine cowling behind the propeller spinner.
(p) On the L/H side of the baggage compartment.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S12 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 12
(q) On the back-rest on the right side.
(r) On the right side of the aircraft above the EPU receptacle.
(s) On the instrument panel above the GPS.
Page S12 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.
Supplement 12
There is no change in the emergency procedures with the Brazilian placards and
markings installed..
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change in the normal procedures with the Brazilian placards and
markings installed..
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane with the Brazilian placards
and markings installed..
6.

The change in weight and balance is negligible with the installation of the Brazilian
placards and markings.
7.

The Brazilian placards and markings installed do not affect the description of the
airplane and its systems.
8.

The Brazilian placards and markings installed do not affect the handling,
preventative and corrective maintenance.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S12 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 12
Page S12 - 10
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 13
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 13
GARMIN G500 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S13-3
2.
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES............................................................S13-10
4.
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES..............................................S13-14
5.
PERFORMANCE .................................................................................S13-19
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE.....................................................................S13-19
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ..................S13-20
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ......S13-25
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S13 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
Page S13 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 13
GENERAL
This supplement supplies the information necessary for the efficient operation of the
DA20-C1 airplane when the Garmin G500, Integrated Display System, is installed
as an optional system. The information contained within this supplement is to be
used in conjunction with the complete manual.
This Supplement to the AFM is provided to acquaint the pilot with the limitations as
well as normal, abnormal and emergency operating procedures of the Garmin
G500. The limitations presented are pertinent to the operation of the G500 System
as installed in the DA20-C1 airplane. Garmin provides a detailed Pilots Guide.
Document Number 190-01102-02 (Current Revision). This reference material is not
required to be on board the aircraft but does contain a more in depth description of
all the G500 functions.
This supplement is a permanent part of this Manual and must remain in this Manual
as long as the Garmin G500 is installed.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S13 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
2.
2.1
Cockpit Reference Guide

The Garmin G500 Cockpit Reference Guide, Document Number 190-01102-03,
(Current Revision) must be immediately available to the flight crew.
2.2
System Software Requirements

The G500 must utilize the following or later TCCA/FAA approved software versions
for safe operation:
Component
Identification
Software Version
GDU 620
PFD/MFD
5.02
GRS 77
AHRS
3.02
GDC 74
Air Data Computer
3.08
GMU 44
Magnetometer
2.01
In addition to the main components of the G500, Garmin GNS430W GPS navigator
is interfaced to the G500. The GPS system connected to the G500 must utilize the
following applicable software versions:
2.3
Component
Identification
Software Version
GNS 430W
GPS/WAAS NAV
3.20
GTN 650
GPS/WAAS
5.0
Nav
6.02
AHRS Operational Area

The AHRS used in the G500 is limited in its operational area. Operations are
prohibited north of 72 degrees North and south of 70 degrees South latitudes and in
the following four regions:
(a) North of 65 degrees North latitude between longitude 75 degrees West and
120 degrees West
(b) North of 70 degrees North latitude between longitude 70 degrees West and
128 degrees West
(c) North of 70 degrees North latitude between longitude 85 degrees East and
114 degrees East
Page S13 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 13
(d) South of 55 degrees South latitude between longitude 120 degrees East and
165 degrees East
Loss of G500 heading and attitude may occur beyond these regions, but this will not
affect the GPS track.
2.4
Navigation Angle
The GDU 620 Navigation Angle can be set to either True or Magnetic on the AUX
page. The Navigation Angle defines whether the GDU 620 headings are
referenced to True or Magnetic North. The Navigation Angle set in the GDU 620
must match that which is set on the GNS navigator interfaced to the unit.
2.5
Aerobatic Maneuvers
Conducting aerobatic maneuvers may cause the attitude information displayed on
the G500 to be incorrect or temporarily removed from the display.
2.6
Kinds of Operation
The aircraft with the Garmin G500 installed is limited to Day/Night VFR operations
only.
The table below lists the minimum fully functional G500 system Elements required
for VFR operations.
Equipment
Number
Installed/ Required
Primary/Multi Flight Display
1 or 2
Air Data Computer (ADC)
1 or 2
Standby Airspeed Indicator
Standby Attitude Indicator (For operation in EASA

member countries only)
Standby Altimeter
Magnetic Compass
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S13 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
2.7
Placards
The placards that follow pertain only to the instrument panel with the Garmin G500
Integrated Display and must be installed:
(a) Switches on the instrument panel below the GDU 620 display
(1) PULSE switch included in with the lights.
(2) PITOT switch replaces the PULSE switch
(b) On the flap controller
(c) Power setting below the instrument panel
(d) On the fuel quantity indicator
Page S13 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 13
(e) Limitations on the right upper corner of the instrument panel
(f) Limitations, for aircraft operated in European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA)
member countries only.
This aeroplane is classified as

a very light aeroplane approved
for day and night VFR only, in
manoeuvres except for intentional
limitations.
NO SMOKING
LIGHTS
TAXI/MAP
INST.
EQUIP
COOLING
DATA
LINK
TAS
MASTER
MASTER
CONTROL
ICS
FLAPS
TRIM
POSITION
STROBE
AVIONICS
LANDING
SYSTEM
AH
AVIONICS
ATC
COM1
FUEL
PUMP
START
SYSTEM
FUEL/QTY.
GPS/NAV
1
COM2
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
EGT
OIL TEMP

BATTERY
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
GEN.
GEN.
CONTROL
ELECTRICAL
AUX.
POWER
PFD
ADC
May 15, 2012
AHRS
Page S13 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
(g) Circuit breaker designations on the right side of the instrument panel
OR
Page S13 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 13
(h) Maneuvering speed on the left side of the instrument panel
(i) Trim placard on the upper left corner of the instrument panel
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S13 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
(j) The placards that follow pertain only when the UMA engine intruments and
Garmin GTN 650/GTR 225 are installed with the G500
(1) Switches on the instrument panel below the GDU 620 display
(2) Circuit breaker designations on the right side of the instrument panel
(3) Maneuvering speed and limitations placard center panel
Page S13 - 10
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Supplement 13
3.
3.1
There is no change in the emergency procedures.
3.2
Abnormal Procedures
These procedures supersede those presented as markings or placards, or
documented in the aircrafts TCCA/FAA approved AFM as a result of the installation
of the G500 PFD/MFD system. All other emergency procedures remain in effect.
(a) If primary flight information (Heading, Altitude or Airspeed) on the PFD is not
available or appears invalid, utilize the standby instruments installed around
and adjacent to the G500, as required.
(b) The AHRS requires at least one GPS or air data input to function properly. In
the unlikely event that GPS data or air data is not received by the AHRS, the
system will subsequently lose attitude and heading and the pilot will be required
to use the standby instrumentation. In this instance, the PFD will not provide
Attitude, Heading, Altitude, or Airspeed information; however, if the PFD is
receiving valid GPS information, the reversionary data on the PFD provides
GPS track and GPS Altitude data along with course information and deviations
which are still valid and may be used to navigate.
(c) If navigation information on the PFD/MFD (HSI, RMI, WPT bearing and
distance information, or Moving Map Data) is not available or appears invalid,
select an alternate source (via CDI key or 1-2 key) or utilize the data directly
from the navigation equipment as required.
(d) If any of the data sources from SVT become unreliable or unavailable, the
display of synthetic terrain will automatically revert to the non-SVT PFD display
of blue over brown. Additionally, if during the course of normal operations there
is any discrepancy between actual terrain around the aircraft and terrain shown
on the SVT display, the display of synthetic vision should be manually turned off
using the procedure in paragraph 4.3 of this supplement.
(e) If GPS position information from the GNS430W is not valid due to an inability to
track GPS, the own-ship icon on the MFD is removed and NO GPS
POSITION text is overlaid on the MFD moving map. The system will
annunciate a loss of integrity, LOI on the HSI. The LOI annunciation will be
colored yellow and the HSI needle will flag. The pilot should select an alternate
navigation source (via CDI key or 1-2 key). Pressing the CDI soft key will
change the HSI navigation source. If GPS navigation is subsequently restored,
the MFD moving map will display the own-ship icon, and the HIS navigation
source may be selected to GPS; at that time the LOI annunciation will be
removed.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 11
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
3.3
Abnormal Indications
3.3.1 Heading Failure

A magnetometer failure is indicated by a HDG with a red X over it just to the left of
the heading display. If the GDU620 is still receiving valid GPS ground track from
the GNS navigator, the heading will be replaced with GPS ground track in magenta.
The aircraft can be flown by reference to GPS ground track instead of heading. In
this case, the autopilot will continue to fly in HDG mode, but the course being sent
to the autopilot will be based on ground track instead of magnetic heading.
A complete Heading Failure (magnetometer and GPS ground track failure) is
indicated by the digital heading presentation being replaced with a red X and the
compass rose digits being removed. The course pointer will indicate straight up and
operate much like a traditional CDI with the Omni-Bearing Selector being adjusted
by the PFD knob set to CRS.
Under this condition, the pilot must use an alternate source of heading such as the
standby compass. If the installation includes an autopilot, the pilot workload may be
reduced by operating that system in NAV mode.
3.3.2 AHRS Failure
A failure of the AHRS is indicated by a removal of the sky/ground presentation, a
red X, and a yellow "AHRS FAILURE" shown on the PFD. A heading failure will
also occur as described above in 3.3.1.
(a) Set course datum using CRS selection of the PFD knob
(b) Seek VFR conditions or land as soon as practical.
3.3.3 Air Data Computer (ADC) Failure
Complete loss of the Air Data Computer is indicated by a red X and yellow text over
the airspeed, altimeter, vertical speed, TAS and OAT displays. Some derived
functions, such as true airspeed and wind calculations, will also be lost.
(a) Use Standby Airspeed Indicator and Altimeter
(b) Seek VFR conditions or land as soon as practical.
3.4
Loss of Electrical Power

In the event of a total loss of electrical power, the G500 system will cease to operate
and the pilot must utilize the standby instruments to fly the aircraft.
Page S13 - 12
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28

3.5
Supplement 13
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and Advisories

The following tables show the color and significance of the Warning, Caution, and
Advisory messages which can appear on the G500 displays.
NOTE
The G500 cockpit reference guide and the G500 pilot's guide contain detailed
descriptions of the annunciator system and all Warnings, Cautions and Advisories.
WARNING annunciations - Red
Annunciation
Pilot Action
Cause
AIRSPEED FAIL
Use Standby
Airspeed
Display system is not receiving airspeed

input from the air data computer;
accompanied by a red X through the
airspeed display.
ALTITUDE FAIL
Use Standby
Altitude.
Display system is not receiving altitude input

from the air data computer; accompanied by
a red X through the altimeter display.
VERT SPD FAIL
Cross check
instruments.
Display system is not receiving vertical

speed input from the air data computer;
accompanied by a red X through the vertical
speed display.
HDG
Use standby
Magnetic Compass
or GPS track
information.
Display system is not receiving valid heading

input from the AHRS; accompanied by a
red X through the digital heading display.
Red X
Reference the data

source or alternate
equipment.
A red X through any display field, indicates

that display field is not receiving data or is
corrupted.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 13
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
CAUTION annunciations - Yellow

Annunciation
Pilot Action
Cause
AHRS Aligning
Keep wings level
AHRS is aligning. Keep wings level using

Limit aircraft banking reference or standby attitude indicator (if
as AHRS aligns
installed). AHRS will align even if you must
OK to taxi.
bank, but the alignment time may be slightly
longer if maneuvering.
If the system is
GPS data on the system is no longer valid.
configured with dual
The Moving Map and associated data are
NO GPS POSITION
GPS, press the
not updating.
1-2 button.
TRAFFIC
No Traffic Data
Visually acquire the

traffic to see and
avoid.
The configured traffic system has

determined that nearby traffic may be a
threat to the aircraft.
Use vigilance, as the The configured traffic system is not able to

traffic sensor is not detect traffic and/or provide the pilot with any
able to detect traffic. traffic awareness.
Advisories - White
Annunciation
Various Alert Messages
may appear under the
MFD ALERTS soft key.
Page S13 - 14
DOT Approved
Pilot Action
View and understand all advisory messages. Typically, they
indicate communication issues within the G500 system.
Refer to the G500 Cockpit Reference for appropriate pilot or
service action.
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
4.
Supplement 13
NORMAL PROCEDURES
Detailed operating procedures are described in the Garmin G500 Cockpit
Reference Guide, Document No. 190-01102-03, Rev D or a later appropriate
revision and in the Garmin G500 Pilots Guide, Document No. 190-01102-02, Rev
C, or a later appropriate revision.
4.1
Database Cards
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE THE GARMIN G500 SYSTEM
USING AN OUT-OF-DATE DATABASE. OUT-OFDATE DATABASE INFORMATION CAN CAUSE A
FLIGHT SAFETY HAZARD.
NOTE
The G500 utilizes several databases. Database titles
display in yellow if expired or in question. The G500
receives the calendar data from the GPS, but only after
acquiring a position fix. Database cycle information is
displayed at power up on the MFD display, but more
detailed information is available on the AUX pages.
Internal database prevents incorrect data being
displayed.
The upper Secure Digital (SD) data card slot is typically vacant as it is used for
software maintenance and navigational database updates. The lower data card slot
should contain a data card with the systems terrain/obstacle information and
optional data including Safe Taxi, FliteCharts and ChartView electronic charts.
The terrain databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
Coverage of the terrain database is between North 75 latitude and South 60
latitude in all longitudes. Coverage of the airport terrain database is worldwide.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a
potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles, 200 feet and higher, are included in the
obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily
charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. Coverage of
the obstacle database includes the United States and Europe. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 15
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
The Garmin SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected
airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately
displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways, ramps, runways,
terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The Garmin FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the coverage area
purchased. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated within 180
days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
The Jeppesen ChartView electronic charts database contains procedure charts for
the coverage area purchased. An own-ship position icon will be displayed on these
charts. This database is updated on a 14-day cycle. If not updated within 70 days of
the expiration date, ChartView will no longer function.
Page S13 - 16
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28

4.2
Supplement 13
PFD Knob and Soft Keys

The basic PFD controls are on the left side of the GDU 620 unit, next to and
beneath the PFD display. The rotary knob performs the function annunciated on the
display just to the upper left of the HSI: HDG, CRS, ALT, V/S, or BARO. If no
function is annunciated then the knob is providing a HDG function. Assigning the
function of the knob is done by pressing/releasing one of the dedicated function
buttons to the left of the display.
NOTE
After 10 seconds of inactivity in another mode, the PFD
knob selected mode will revert to HEADING mode.
-
Press the desired PFD mode selection key (HDG, CRS, ALT, V/S, or
BARO). A window will be displayed near the upper right corner of the
HSI showing the current value for that mode.
Turn the PFD knob to select the desired value.
(a) PFD Bezel Keys
Heading (HDG)
Selects Heading Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in

Heading mode will center the Heading Bug on the current
Heading. This is the default mode for the PFD knob. If the
Heading is invalid, the PFD knob will revert to Course
mode. Set the heading on the HSI by turning the PFD knob
after pressing the HDG key.
Course (CRS)
Selects Course Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in

Course mode will center the CDI for a VOR or OBS mode
course.
Altimeter (ALT)
Selects Altitude Select mode. Pressing the PFD knob in

Altimeter mode will enter the current altitude in the Altitude
Select window. Set the Altitude Bug by turning the PFD
knob after pressing the ALT key.
Vertical Speed (V/S)
Selects Vertical Speed (V/S) mode. Pressing the PFD knob

in V/S mode will synchronize the bug to the current vertical
speed.
Barometer (BARO)
Selects Barometric Setting Select mode. Pressing the PFD

knob in Baro mode will enter the standard pressure (29.92
in) value.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 17
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
(b) PFD Soft Keys
The soft keys are located along the bottoms of the displays below the soft key
labels. The soft key labels shown depend on the soft key level or page being
displayed. The soft keys can be used to select the appropriate soft key function.
When a soft key is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and
remains this way until it is turned off, at which time it reverts to white text on black
background. When a soft key function is disabled, the soft key label is subdued
(dimmed). Soft keys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
4.3
CDI
The CDI soft key toggles between the selection of GPS or VOR/
LOC as the active navigation source.
PFD
Pressing the PFD soft key displays the BRG and BACK soft keys.
BRG
The BRG soft key cycles through the available bearing indicator
modes (NAV, GPS, ADF, or None).
SYN VIS
The SYN VIS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision Technology

is installed. It enables Synthetic Vision and displays the associated
soft keys.
SYN TERR
The SYN TERR soft key is available if Synthetic Vision

Technology is installed and enables synthetic terrain depiction.
HRZN HDG
The HRZN HDG soft key is available if Synthetic Vision

Technology is installed. Pressing this key enables horizon
heading marks and digits.
APTSIGNS
The APTSIGNS soft key is available if Synthetic Vision

Technology is installed and enables airport sign posts.
BACK
The BACK soft key returns to the pages default soft key options.
MFD Knobs and MFD Soft Keys

The MFD controls are on the right side of the GDU 620 unit, next to and beneath the
MFD display. The rotary knobs scroll through various page groups and pages of the
MFD and manipulate data and settings by pressing the knob to activate a cursor.
Soft keys at the bottom of the display allow for some quick functions to be
performed on each page. The soft keys operate by press and release. More
detailed configuration is typically available by pressing the MENU button, which is
on the right side of the display.
Pressing and holding down the CLR key is a good way to get back to the main map
page on the MFD. This can be used as a quick way back, or when the pilot has
selected a submenu within the system.
Page S13 - 18
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Supplement 13
(a) MFD Knobs

The MFD knobs are for navigating and selecting information on the MFD pages.
Small (Inner) Knob
Selects a specific page within a page group. Pressing the

small MFD knob turns the selection cursor ON and OFF.
When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the
applicable window by turning the small and large MFD
knobs. In this case, the large MFD knob moves the cursor
on the page and the small MFD knob selects individual
characters or values for the highlighted cursor location.
Large (Outer) Knob
Selects the MFD page group. When the cursor is ON, the
large MFD knob moves the cursor to highlight available
fields.
(b) MFD Bezel Keys
Range (RNG)
Pressing the Range arrow keys changes the range on the

Map pages. The Up arrow zooms out. The Down arrow
zooms in. The keys also aid in scrolling up and down text
pages.
Menu
Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows

the crew to access additional features or make setting
changes that relate to particular pages.
Enter (ENT)
Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
Clear (CLR)
Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page

menus. Pressing and holding the CLR key displays the
Navigation Map 1 page.
(c) MFD Soft Keys

MFD functions indicated by the soft key labels vary depending on the page
selected and are located at the bottom of the MFD display. Press the soft key
located directly below the soft key label. To select the function indicated on the
soft key label, press the soft key directly below the label.
4.4
AHRS Normal Operating Mode

The AHRS integrity monitoring features require the availability of GPS and Air Data.
The G500 monitors these integrity systems automatically and will alert the pilot
when the AHRS is not receiving GPS or Air Data.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 19
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
4.5
Course Pointer Auto Slewing

The G500 HSI will auto slew, i.e. automatically rotate the GPS course pointer to the
desired course defined by each GPS leg. The system will also auto slew the
VHFNAV course pointer when the CDl transitions to a LOC setting if an ILS, LOC,
LOC BC, LDA, or SDF approach is activated in the GPS/WAAS navigator.
The VHFNAV (green) course pointer will only auto slew if the approach is active in
the navigator, the LOC frequency is loaded in the active NAV frequency, and then
the HSI source is changed to the corresponding VHFNAV for the approach. Back
Course approaches will auto slew to the reciprocal course.
The system is not capable of automatically setting the inbound VHFNAV course
pointer if an approach is not active in the GNS Navigation System.
4.6
Terrain Display
The G500 terrain and obstacle information appears on the MFD display as red and
yellow tiles or towers, and is depicted for advisory only. Aircraft maneuvers and
navigation must not be predicated upon the use of the terrain display. Terrain unit
alerts are advisory only and are not equivalent to warnings provided by TAWS.
4.7
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)

The SVT system may be turned on or off, as desired. To access the synthetic vision
system soft key menu, press the PFD soft key on the GDU 620, followed by the
SYN VIS soft key. Synthetic vision terrain, horizon headings, and airport signs can
be toggled on and off from this menu. Press the BACK soft key to return to the root
PFD menu.
4.8
Autopilot Operations
The G500 PFD/MFD System offers various integration capabilities dependent
mainly upon the type of autopilot installed in a particular aircraft.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane.
6.

Upon removal and installation of the Garmin G500, the change of empty mass and
corresponding center of gravity of the airplane must be recorded according to
Chapter 6 of the AFM.
Page S13 - 20
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
EPU
PULSE
LANDING
TAXI
LIGHTS
POSITION
STROBE
MAP
INSTRUMENT LT.
OFF
ON
OFF
NOSE DN
NEUTRAL
NOSE UP
L
BOTH
START

DO NOT ENGAGE
STARTER WHEN
PROP IS MOVING.
T
R
I
M
G
E
N
E
P
U
FUEL PRIME
S
T
A
R
T
NORMAL FLIGHT - OFF
C
A
N
O
P
Y
HUNDREDS
RPM
20
OFF
ON
25
1101
GEN/BAT
HOURS
50 0 0 0 0
3
35
15
10
30
AVIONIC
MASTER
100
C
PUSH
SQ
PUSH
ID
FUEL
PUMP
VFR
IDENT
GARMIN
VOL
PULL SQUELCH
COMM
PUSH
C/V
VOL /
VOL /
PWR
HI
LO
MRK
MUTE
ALT
ON
119.80
VLOC
SENS
COM/
GARMIN
PILOT
COM
OFF/
VOL
80
ALT
R
EC
VFE (LDG)
78 KTS.
VFE (T/O)
100 KTS.
MEM
975
100
SL40
D
CLR
START
STOP
FUNC
DEFAULT
NAV
28.8
28.7
28.6
GNS 430
COPILOT
TEST
GMA 340
CLR
CRSR
GTX 330
PUSH
CRSR
GPS
ENT
MENU
RNG
PASS
VOL
VOL
PULL
COM
IN.Hg
29
Flaps
12300
APOLLO
PROC
K
t
n
m
PRESSURE ALT
f
t
FPL
165
GS
000
TKE
4.85
DIS
KHPN
WPT
CREW
PILOT
PA
ICS ISOLATION
ADF
FEET
SPKR
CABIN AUDIO
DME
CALIBRATED
TO
20.000 FEET
NAV2
970
8 ALT
NAV
1200
MON RCL
MSG
COM
1/2
NAV1
mb
13 14 15
KHPN
COM3
MIC
COM3
OBS
s121.50
CDI
GPS
TERM
108.00
117.95
VLOC
136.975
118.000
FLAP SPEEDS
COM2
MIC
COS
COM2
COM1
MIC
60
40
COM1
KNOTS
AIRSPEED
A OM
GARMIN
120
140
160
12
OF
F
AUTO
PILOT
10
11
60
-
105
x10
220
VDO
AMPS
VDO
OIL
170
VDO
FUEL
125
165
145
28
60
+
240
6 9 12
16.5
PSI
EGT
85
3.5
25
75
45
65
21 S 15
16
200
F
300
420
Usable
FUEL
VDO
Cylinder Head
Temp.
10
60
VDO
1
1
600
16
100
460
10 12 14
VOLT
VDO
OIL
30
lbs./sq.inch
VDO
81L/21.4 US gal.
100
17
27
TO
PU L L
LIGHTS
CA G E
GEN.
CONTROL
FUEL/QTY.
SYSTEM
ICS
PFD
X
ELECTRICAL
AUX.
POWER
START
COM1
FUEL
PUMP
ATC
AH
SYSTEM
LANDING
TAS
AVIONICS
STROBE
NO SMOKING
AHRS
EGT
OIL TEMP
HOURS 1/10
0 0 0 0 3 0
VDO
22
24

21
COM2
25
ADC
ENGINE
FUEL PRESS
OIL PRESS
GPS/NAV
1
This airplane is classified as a

very light airplane approved for
maneuvers including intentional
spinning are prohibited. See
Flight Manual for other limitations.
20
AVIONICS
POSITION
26
GEN.
X
BATTERY
TRIM
MASTER
CONTROL
O
F
F
19
DATA
LINK
INST.
FLAPS
MASTER
EQUIP
COOLING
TAXI/MAP
18
23

Supplement 13
7.
7.1
Instrument Panel
ST
BY
Figure S13-1 - Instrument Panel with Garmin G500 System Installed
Page S13 - 21
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
Refer to Figure S13-1.
Instrument Panel - Major Instruments and Controls

1.
Flap Speeds
11.
Air Speed Indicator
2.
Master Switch Panel
12.
Auto Selector
- AVIONICS MASTER
13.
NAV/COM GPS
- FUEL PUMP Switch
14.
Altimeter
- GEN/BAT Switch
15.
VHF COM
3.
Fuel Prime
16.
Magnetic Compass
4.
Ignition Switch
17.
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)
5.
Instrument Light Switch
18.
6.
Light Switch Panel
19.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
- MAP
20.
- STROBE Light Switch
21.
- POSITION
22.
Articial Horizon Indicator (for EASA
- TAXI Light Switch
member countries and optional for
- LANDING Light Switch
Non-EASA member countries)
- Optional Switch
23.
Hobbs Hourmeter
- EPU*
24.
14 VDC Aux Power Outlet
- PITOT*
25.
Circuit Breaker Panel
- Auto Pilot*
26.
7.
Trim Indicator
27.
Voltmeter
8.
GDU 620 Display
28.
Ammeter
9.
Warning Lights
29.
SL40 (COM 2)
10.
Engine RPM
Note: Items marked * are optional

- EPU
- Auto Pilot
Page S13 - 22
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28

7.2
Supplement 13
Instrument Panel with UMA Engine Instruments and Garmin GTN 650/GTR 225
installed.
Figure S13-2 - Instrument Panel with UMA Engine Instruments and Garmin GTN 650/
GTR 225 Installed
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 23
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
Refer to Figure S13-2.
Instrument Panel - Major Instruments and Controls

1.
GDU 620 Display
21.
Gen/Bat Master Switch
2.
Trim Indicator
22.
Articial Horizon Indicator (for EASA
3.
Warning Lights
member countries and optional for
4.
Engine RPM
Non-EASA member countries)
5.
Airspeed Indicator
23.
Fuel Prime Switch
6.
Audio Panel
24.
Ignition Switch
7.
Altimeter
25.
Instrument Light Switch
8.
GPS/Nav/Com
26.
Light Switch Panel
9.
Magnetic Compass
-Map Switch
10.
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)
-Strobe Switch
11.
-Position Switch
12.
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
-Taxi Switch
13.
-Landing Switch
14.
15.
Voltmeter
-Pitot Switch
16.
-EPU Switch
17.
Ammeter
-Autopilot Switch
18.
Transponder
28.
Hourmeter
19.
Flap Controller
29
14 Vdc Aux Power Outlet
20.
Comm (#2)
28.
Page S13 - 24
DOT Approved
27
Operational Switches
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28

7.2
Supplement 13
Avionics - General
The G500 system consists of:
- Garmin Display Unit (GDU) 620 (PFD/MFD)
- Garmin data Computer (GDC) 74A [Air Data Computer (ADC)]
- Garmin Reference System (GRS) 77 [Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)]
- Garmin Magnetometer Unit (GMU) 44
- Garmin Navigation System GNS 400 Series Radios or GTN 600 Series Radios
- Garmin Temperature Probe (GTP) 59.
The system presents primary flight instrumentation and navigation. It also provides
a moving map to the pilot through large format displays.
(a) GDU 620 Display
This displays the real time True Airspeed calculations and selectable winds aloft
data, as well as airplane ground speed, GPS active waypoint, distance-towaypoint, desired/actual track, and more.
In normal operating mode, the Primary Flight Display (PFD) presents graphical
flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, vertical speed).
The Multi-Function Flight Display (MFD) normally displays a full color moving
map with navigation and flight plan information, traffic, weather and terrain.
(b) GRS 77 AHRS
The GRS 77 is an attitude and heading reference unit that provides aircraft
attitude and flight characteristics information to the GDU 620. The unit contains
advanced tilt sensors, accelerometers, and rate sensors. In addition, the
GRS 77 interfaces with both the GDC 74A air data computer and the GMU 44
magnetometer. The GRS 77 also utilizes GPS signals sent from the
GPS/WAAS navigator. Actual attitude and heading information is sent using
ARINC 429 digital interface to the GDU 620.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 25
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
(c) GDC 74A ADC
The GDC 74A air data computer receives information from the pitot/static
system and the GTP 59 outside air temperature (OAT) sensor. The GDC 74A is
responsible for providing pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT
information to the G500 system. The GDC 74A provides data to the GDU 620
and GRS 77 using ARINC 429 digital interfaces. The GDC 74A also
communicates maintenance and configuration information to the GDU 620
using an RS-232 interface.
(d) GMU 44 Magnetometer
The GMU 44 magnetometer senses magnetic field information. Data is sent to
the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This
unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the
GRS 77 using an RS-485 digital interface.
(e) GNS 430W GPS (Optional)
The GNS 430W unit is a panel-mount GPS navigator with a color moving map.
Position and flight plan data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232
and ARINC 429 interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the
GRS 77 AHRS in order to ensure normal AHRS operation. The GNS 430W
also provides LOC/GS information for display on the GDU 620 HSI via an
ARINC 429 interface.
(f) GTN 650 GPS (Optional)
The GTN 650 unit is a touch screen, panel-mount, GPS navigator with a colour
moving map. Position and flight plan data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD
via RS-232 and ARINC 429 interfaces. GPS position information is also
forwarded to the GRS 77 AHRS in order to ensure normal AHRS operation.
The GTN 650 also provides LOC/GS information for display on the GDU 620
HSI via an ARINC 429 interface.
Page S13 - 26
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Supplement 13
Figure S13-3 - G500 System Overview with Optional and Required Equipment
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
February 28, 2014
Page S13 - 27
DOT Approved
Supplement 13
8.

There is no change in the handling, preventive or corrective maintenance of the
airplane.
Page S13 - 28
DOT Approved
February 28, 2014
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 28
Supplement 14
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 14
FRENCH PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S14-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................S14-7
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S14 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 14
Page S14 - 2
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
1.
Supplement 14
GENERAL
This supplement addresses the placards and markings for airplanes operating in
France. Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included in
this supplement.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS.
(a) On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
(b) On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the R/H side.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S14 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 14
(c) On the interior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
(d) On the interior of the canopy frame, on the R/H side.
(e) On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
Page S14 - 4
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 14
(f) Next to the PARK BRAKE lever.
(g) On the right upper corner of the instrument panel.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
May 15, 2012
Page S14 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 14
(h) On the left side of the instrument panel, near the top.
(i) On the instrument panel, below the airspeed indicator.
Page S14 - 6
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
3.
Supplement 14
There is no change in the emergency procedures with the French placards and
markings installed.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change in the normal procedures with the French placards and
markings installed.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane with the French placards and
markings installed.
6.

The change in weight and balance is negligible with the installation of the French
7.

The French placards and markings installed do not affect the description of the
8.

The French placards and markings installed do not affect the handling, preventative
and corrective maintenance.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S14 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 14
Page S14 - 8
DOT Approved
May 15, 2012
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 26
Supplement 15
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 15
GERMAN PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S15-3
2.
3.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES............................................................S15-14
4.
NORMAL OPERATING PROCEDURES..............................................S15-14
5.
PERFORMANCE .................................................................................S15-14
6.
WEIGHT AND BALANCE.....................................................................S15-14
7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE AIRPLANE AND ITS SYSTEMS ..................S15-14
8.
HANDLING, PREVENTIVE AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ......S15-14
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S15 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 15
Page S15 - 2
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
1.
Supplement 15
GENERAL
Germany. Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included
in this supplement.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
VERRIEGELN
February 12, 2013
NICHT AM SPINNER SCHIEBEN
EXTERNAL
POWER
14 VOLTS
ENTRIEGELN
HAUBE NICHT IN VERRIEGELTEM ZUSTAND SCHLIESSEN
MASSE
ANSCHLUSS
Tankdrain unter dem Rumpf.

VOR DEM TANKEN ERDEN!
AUF
STUFE
UNTEN
ZUM OEFFENE DER HAUBE

BEIDE SEITEN
ENTRIEGELN

AUSFLIEGBAR 91/24.0 US gal.
(a) On the exterior of the airplane, on the upper surfaces.
Page S15 - 3
DOT Approved
Page S15 - 4
DOT Approved
HERE
ELT
DE LA RADIOBALISE
DE DETRESSE
EMPLACEMENT
ICI L
INSTALLED HERE
EMERGENCY
LOCATOR TRANSMITTER
February 12, 2013

AUF
ZUM OEFFENE DER HAUBE

BEIDE SEITEN
ENTRIEGELN
6.0 US Qts.
5.68 I
SAE 20W-50
ODER GEMAESS
FLUGHANDBUCH
OEL
NUR LUFTFAHRT OEL VERWENDEN !
ACHTUNG!
WINTER KIT SOLLTE UNTER -5 C INSTALLIERT SEIN.
WINTER KIT MUSS UEBER 12.5 C ENTFERNT WERDEN!
STUFE
UNTEN
Supplement 15
(b) On the exterior of the airplane, on the upper surfaces.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 15
(c) On the exterior of the airplane, on the lower surfaces.
WARTUNGSTANKDRAIN
TANKDRAIN
Diamond AIRCRAFT
INDUSTRIES
LONDON, ONTARIO, CANADA

MODEL NO. :
SERIAL NO. :
YEAR MFD. :
DA20-C1
REGISTRATION :
MASSE
1.8 bar
26 psi
180 kPa
2.3 bar
33 psi
230 kPa
ZUM VERZURREN
(d)
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S15 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 15
(e) On the exterior of the airplane, on the lower surfaces.
ZUM VERZURREN
2.3 bar
33 psi
230 kPa
ZUM VERZURREN
Page S15 - 6
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013

Rauchen verboten!
Manoevergeschwind. VA =106kts
AUS
IM NORMALFLUG AUS
ANLASSEINSPRITZUNG
Den Starter bei

drehendem Properller
nicht betaetigen!
Motor koennte
beschaedigt werden.
ACHTUNG!
KOPFLASTIG
NEUTRAL
HECKLASTIG
Ausfliegbar
91L/24 US gal.
Dieses Flugzeug ist eingestuft als Leichtflugzeug

und nur fuer VFR-Fluege am Tag ausserhalb
von Vereisungsbedingungen zugelassen. Alle
Kunstflugmanoever, auch beabsichtigtes Trudeln, sind
verboten. Betriebsgrenzen siehe Flughandbuch.
TRIMMUNG

Supplement 15
(f) On the interior of the airplane, on the instrument panel.
Page S15 - 7
DOT Approved
Supplement 15
An
VOLL REICH
LEERLAUF
START
LANDG
START
LANDG
1. Kraftstoffpumpe
2. Gemisch
3. Leistung
REISE
MIK
GPS nur fuer VFR!
REISE
BEI LEERLAUFBETRIEB:
(g) On the interior of the airplane, on the instrument panel.
Page S15 - 8
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
EPU
BLINKEN STROBE
ROLL
KARTE
GEN/BAT
LICHTER
POSITION
Note: The content of this label

changes for different
installed equipment.
LANDE
AUTOPILOT MAX. ZULAESSIGE GESCHW. 148 KIAS

A/P BETR. VERBOTEN FUER START & LANDING
LANDEKLAPPEN MAX. T/O (15 ) BEI A/P BETR.
AVIONIK KRAFTST.
HAUPT.
PUMPE
INST.
AUS
HELL
DUNKEL
KLAPPEN

Supplement 15
(h) On the interior of the airplane, on the instrument panel.
Page S15 - 9
DOT Approved
Supplement 15
(i) On the interior of the airplane, Circuit Breakers on the instrument panel.
MOTOR
MOTOR
START
KRAFT.DR.
OELDRUCK
EGT
OELTEMP
WENDEZEIGER
O.A.T.
STROBE
LANDE
DREHZ.
ROLL/KARTE
KRAFST.
PUMPE
INST.
STAUROHR
HEIZUNG
BLINK LICHT
POSITION
AVIONIK
HAUPT.
HAUPT.
CONTROL
NAV/COM
GPS/COM
Note: The content of the Avionics Label

changes for different installed equipment.
AVIONIK
MARKER
DME
ADF
HSI
Note: The content of the Avionics Label

changes for different installed equipment.
ELEKTRIK
BATTERIE
Page S15 - 10
DOT Approved
GEN.
GEN.
CONTROL
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 15
ON
NUR MIT GEPACKNETZ
OFF
ARM
ON
O
O
O O
OP O
MAX. ZALADUNG 20kg
O O
P O
O
O
SCHLIESSEN
OEFFNEN
Zum Oeffnen der Haube
OFF
(j) On the interior of the airplane, general placards and markings.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S15 - 11
DOT Approved
Page S15 - 12
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
REGISTRATION :
MODEL NO. :
SERIAL NO. :
YEAR MFD. :
DA20-C1
LONDON, ONTARIO, CANADA
Diamond AIRCRAFT
INDUSTRIES
GASHEBEL REIBUNG
Zum Oeffnen der Haube

beide Seiten
entriegeln
OEFFNEN
SCHLIESSEN
Supplement 15
(k) On the interior of the airplane, general placards and markings.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 15
(l) On the interior of the airplane, general placards and markings.

PARK
BREMSE
PARK
BREMSE
55
(Leather Seats)
55
(Sheepskin Seats)
BRAND
HAHN
Hydraulic Fluid 4
MIL-H-5606
Hydraulic Fluid
MIL-H-5606
VOLLGAS
VOLLGAS
VOLLGAS
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S15 - 13
DOT Approved
Supplement 15
3.
There is no change in the emergency procedures with the German placards and
markings installed.
4.
NORMAL PROCEDURES
There is no change in the normal procedures with the German placards and
markings installed.
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane with the German placards
and markings installed.
6.

The change in weight and balance is negligible with the installation of the German
7.

The German placards and markings installed do not affect the description of the
8.

The German placards and markings installed do not affect the handling,
Page S15 - 14
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 16
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 16
SPANISH PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S15-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................S15-6
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S16 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 16
Page S16 - 2
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
1.
Supplement 16
GENERAL
Mexico. Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included in
this supplement.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS.
(a) Canopy Latching. On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
PARA LEVANTAR
LA CABINA ABRA
LOS DOS LADOS
ABIERTO
(b) Canopy Latching. On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the R/H side.
PARA LEVANTAR
LA CABINA ABRA
LOS DOS LADOS
ABIERTO
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S16 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 16
(c) Canopy Lock. On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
NO CIERRE LA CABINA CUANDO SE

ENCUENTRE EL SEGURO PUESTO
SIN SEGURO
SEGURO
(d) Fuel Pull Off. Next to the PARK BRAKE lever.
GASO
LINA
JALE
PARA
CERRAR
Page S16 - 4
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 16
(e) On the interior of the airplane, general placards and markings.
(Leather Seats)
HACHA DE
EMERGENCIA
55
(Sheepskin Seats)
55
CERRADO
ABIERTO
PARA LEVANTAR
LA CABINA ABRA
LOS DOS LADOS
CAPACIDAD MAXIMA
EN EQUIPAJE - 44 lbs (20kg)
SOLO CON RED PARA EQUIPAJE
PARA LEVANTAR
LA CABINA ABRA
LOS DOS LADOS ABIERTO
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
CERRADO
Page S16 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 16
3.
There is no change in the emergency procedures with the Spanish placards and
markings installed.
4.

There is no change in the normal operating procedures with the Spanish placards
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane with the Spanish placards
6.

The change in weight and balance is negligible with the installation of the Spanish
7.

The Spanish placards and markings installed do not affect the description of the
8.

The Spanish placards and markings installed do not affect the handling,
Page S16 - 6
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 17
CHAPTER 9
SUPPLEMENT 17
CHINESE PLACARDS AND MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL ..............................................................................................S15-3
2.
3.
4.
5.
PERFORMANCE ...................................................................................S15-6
6.
7.
8.
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S17 - 1
DOT Approved
Supplement 17
Page S17 - 2
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
1.
Supplement 17
GENERAL
Spain. Only portions of the flight manual affected by the installation are included in
this supplement.
2.
2.15
PLACARDS.
(a) Canopy Latching. On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
OPEN
(b) Canopy Latching. On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the R/H side.
OPEN
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
Page S17 - 3
DOT Approved
Supplement 17
(c) Canopy Lock. On the exterior of the canopy frame, on the L/H side.
UNLOCK
LOCK
(d) VLA Limits. On the Instrument Panel..
Page S17 - 4
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
Supplement 17
(e) On the interior of the airplane, general placards and markings.
RESCUE
HAMMER
CLOSE
OPEN
44
MAX.BAGGAGE-44lbs(20kg)
ONLY WITH BAGGAGE NET
FUEL
PULL OFF
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27
February 12, 2013
OPEN
CLOSE
Page S17 - 5
DOT Approved
Supplement 17
3.
There is no change in the emergency procedures with the Chinese placards and
markings installed.
4.

There is no change in the normal operating procedures with the Chinese placards
and markings installed
5.
PERFORMANCE
There is no change in the performance of the airplane with the Chinese placards
6.

The change in weight and balance is negligible with the installation of the Chinese
7.

The Chinese placards and markings installed do not affect the description of the
8.

The Chinese placards and markings installed do not affect the handling,
Page S17 - 6
DOT Approved
February 12, 2013
DOC # DA202-C1
Revision 27

DA20-C1 AFM Rev 28

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DA20-C1 AFM Rev 28

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DA20-C1 AFM Rev 28

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL

INITIAL ISSUE: December 19, 1997

DA20-C1 AIRPLANE FLIGHT

This manual contains the maintenance information

DIAMOND AIRCRAFT INDUSTRIES INC.

INITIAL ISSUE: December 19, 1997

DOC NO. DA202-C1

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL

Applicable Airworthiness Requirements

: AWM Chapter 523-VLA

: Revision 26 - 15 May 2012

: For, Chief, Flight Test

May 15, 2012

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

All rights reserved. Reproduction of this manual or any portion

May 15, 2012

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

May 15, 2012

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

Intentionally left blank

May 15, 2012

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Pages that are DOT-approved (appr) pages Ch.

February 28, 2014

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

February 28, 2014

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

February 28, 2014

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

February 28, 2014

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

February 28, 2014

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

Intentionally Left Blank

February 28, 2014

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

It is only necessary to maintain those

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

February 12, 2013

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

February 12, 2013

DA20-C1 Flight Manual

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

DOT-appr S12-10 15-May-12

DOT-appr S13-26 28-Feb-14

DOT-appr S13-13 28-Feb-14

DOT-appr S13-14 28-Feb-14